Yamaha RX-V595 Manual de usuario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: RX-V595

Categoría: Receptor

Tipo: Manual de usuario

Printed in Malaysia ID

V274950

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

RX-V595

Natural Sound AV Receiver

Récepteur audiovisuel

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

C A

01RX-V595-e/f cv1/4 6/23/99, 4:34 PM1

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the unit is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions

should be followed.

5 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near

water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen

sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming

pool, etc.

6 Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a

cart or stand that is recommended by the

manufacturer.

6A A unit and cart combination should be moved

with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and

uneven surfaces may cause the unit and cart

combination to overturn.

7 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a

wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.

8 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its location

or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For

example, the unit should not be situated on a bed, sofa,

rug, or similar surface, that may block the ventilation

openings; or placed in a built-in installation, such as a

bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of air

through the ventilation openings.

9 Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat sources

such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances that produce

heat.

10 Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power

supply only of the type described in the operating instruc-

tions or as marked on the unit.

11 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or

pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying

particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience recep-

tacles, and the point where they exit from the unit.

12 Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as recom-

mended by the manufacturer.

13 Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be

unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long

period of time.

14 Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that

objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the

inside of the unit.

15 Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced

by qualified service personnel when:

A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been

damaged; or

B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the

unit; or

C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or

D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits

a marked change in performance; or

E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged.

16 Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit

beyond those means described in the operating instruc-

tions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified

service personnel.

17 Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located away

from power lines.

18 Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken

so that the grounding or polarization is not defeated.

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,

within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert

you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may

be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of

electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert you to the presence

of important operating and maintenance

(servicing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the appliance.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS

UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION

01RX-V595-e/f1 6/23/99, 4:09 PM2

English

19 For US customers only:

Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is

connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is

grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage

surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the

National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides informa-

tion with regard to proper grounding of the mast and

supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an

antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only)

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equip-

ment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come

through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion –

and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the

Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group recommend you to avoid

prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee

that interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which

can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,

please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon

lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac-

tory results, please contact the local retailer authorized

to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate

the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha

Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave,

Buena Park, CA 90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC,

to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high

quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this

product MUST be used. Follow all installation instruc-

tions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to

comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regula-

tions, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance

with these requirements provides a reasonable level of

assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and,

if not installed and used according to the instructions

found in the users manual, may cause interference

harmful to the operation of other electronic devices.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in

particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be

connected to the grounding system of the building, as

close to the point of cable entry as practical.

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC

– NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

01RX-V595-e/f1 6/23/99, 4:09 PM3

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES

ACCESSOIRES FOURNIS

• After unpacking, check that the following parts are included.

• Après le déballage, vérifier que les pièces suivantes sont incluses.

• Indoor FM Antenna

• Antenne FM intérieure

• AM Loop Antenna

• Cadre-antenna AM

• Antenna adapter

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

• Adaptateur d’antenne

(Modèle pour les Etats-Unis et le

Canada seulement)

• Batteries (size AA, R6, UM-3)

• Piles (taille AA, R6, UM-3)

• Remote control transmitter

• Télécommande

01RX-V595-e/f1 6/23/99, 4:09 PM4

English

● 5 Speaker Configuration

Main: 70 W + 70 W (8Ω) RMS Output

Power, 0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz

Center: 70 W (8Ω) RMS Output

Power, 0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz

Rear: 70 W + 70 W (8Ω) RMS Output

Power, 0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz

Main: 65 W + 65 W (8Ω) RMS Output

Power, 0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz

Center: 65 W (8Ω) RMS Output

Power, 0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz

Rear: 65 W + 65 W (8Ω) RMS Output

Power, 0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz

● Digital Sound Field Processor

● Dolby Digital Decoder

● Dolby Pro Logic Surround Decoder

● CINEMA DSP: Theater-like Sound

Experience by the Combination of Dolby

Surround and YAMAHA DSP Technology

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES........................................... 4

FEATURES .................................................................... 5

CAUTION ....................................................................... 6

●Introduction

FEATURES ON SOUND EFFECT................................. 7

CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS ......................... 9

●Preparation

SPEAKER SETUP ....................................................... 12

CONNECTIONS........................................................... 14

ADJUSTMENTS

BEFORE USING THIS UNIT .................................. 22

●Basic Oparation

BASIC OPERATIONS .................................................. 27

TUNING OPERATIONS ............................................... 31

SETTING THE SLEEP TIMER..................................... 36

●Information about DSP

USING DIGITAL SOUND FIELD

PROCESSOR (DSP) .............................................. 37

●Advanced Information

ADJUSTMENTS

IN THE “SET MENU” MODE...................................43

●Remote Control Transmitter

REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER......................... 45

SETUP CODES ........................................................... 50

NOTES ABOUT THE REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER ...................................................... 51

TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................. 52

SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................... 54

LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES......................108

FEATURES

CONTENTS

● 6-Channel External Decoder Input for DTS

and other future formats

● Automatic Input Balance Control for

Dolby Pro Logic Surround

● Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker

Balance Adjustment

● Speaker Output Mode Changing

Capability

● 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning

● Automatic Preset Tuning

● Preset Station Shifting Capability

(Preset Editing)

● Video Signal Input/Output Capability

● SLEEP Timer

● Universal Remote Control

Transmitter with Preset Manufacturer

Codes

01RX-V595-e/f1 6/23/99, 4:09 PM5

CAUTION : READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

1. To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2. Install this unit in a cool, dry, clean place – away from

windows, heat sources, sources of excessive vibration,

dust, moisture and cold. Avoid sources of humming

(transformers, motors). To prevent fire or electrical shock,

do not expose the unit to rain or water.

3. Never open the cabinet. If something drops into the set,

contact your dealer.

4. Do not use force on switches, controls or connection wires.

When moving the unit, first disconnect the power plug and

the wires connected to other equipment. Never pull the

wires themselves.

5. The openings on the unit cover assure proper ventilation of

the unit. If these openings are obstructed, the temperature

inside the unit will rise rapidly. Therefore, avoid placing

objects against these openings, and install the unit in a

well-ventilated area to prevent fire and damage.

Be sure to allow a space of at least 20 cm behind, 20 cm

on the both sides and 30 cm above the top panel of the unit

to prevent fire and damage.

6. The voltage used must be the same as that specified on

this unit. Using this unit with a higher voltage than speci-

fied is dangerous and may result in fire or other accidents.

YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage

resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than

specified.

7. Digital signals generated by this unit may interfere with

other equipment such as tuners, receivers or TVs. Move

this unit farther away from such equipment if interference is

observed.

8. Always set the VOLUME control to “∞” before starting the

audio source play. Increase the volume gradually to an

appropriate level after playback has been started.

9. Do not attempt to clean the unit with chemical solvents; this

might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

10. Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section

regarding common operating errors before concluding that

the unit is faulty.

11. When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(ie., vacation, etc.), disconnect the AC power plug from the

wall outlet.

12. To prevent lightning damage, disconnect the AC power

plug and disconnect the antenna cable when there is an

electrical storm.

13. Grounding or polarization – Precautions should be taken so

that the grounding or polarization of an appliance is not

defeated.

14. AC outlet

Do not connect audio equipment to the AC outlet on the

rear panel if that equipment requires more power than the

outlet is rated to provide.

15. Voltage Selector (China and General Models only)

The voltage selector on the rear panel of this unit must

be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC main supply.

Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as

long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit

itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode.

In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small

quantity of power.

FREQUENCY STEP switch

(China and General Models only)

Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in

different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (located

at the rear) according to the frequency spacing in your area.

Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of

this unit from the AC outlet.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE

OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT AND FULLY INSERT.

THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS COMPLIES WITH

CANADIAN ICES-003.

01RX-V595-e/f1 6/23/99, 4:09 PM6

English

FEATURES ON SOUND EFFECT

This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital

sound field processor. The processor allows you to electroni-

cally expand and change the shape of the audio sound field

from both audio and video sources, creating a theater-like

experience in your listening room. This unit has a total of 8

digital sound field processor (DSP) modes. You can create an

excellent audio sound field by selecting a suitable sound field

(this will, of course, depend on what you will be listening to),

and adding desired adjustments.

In addition, this unit incorporates a Dolby Pro Logic Surround

decoder and Dolby Digital decoder for multi-channel sound

reproduction of Dolby Surround encoded video sources. The

operation of the Dolby Pro Logic Surround or Dolby Digital

decoder can be controlled by selecting a corresponding DSP

program including combined operations of the YAMAHA DSP

and the Dolby Pro Logic Surround or Dolby Digital decoder.

Digital Sound Field Processing

What is it that makes live music so good? Today’s advanced

sound reproduction technology lets you get extremely close to

the sound of a live performance, but chances are you’ll still

notice something missing, the acoustic environment of the live

concert hall. Extensive research into the exact nature of the

sonic reflections that create the ambience of a large hall has

made it possible for YAMAHA engineers to bring you this same

sound in your listening room, so you’ll feel all the sound of a

live concert.

Furthermore, our technicians, armed with sophisticated

measuring equipment, have even made it possible to capture

the acoustics of a variety of actual concert halls, theaters, etc.

from around the world, to allow you to accurately re-create any

one of these live performance environments, all in your home.

Dolby Pro Logic Surround

This unit employs a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder similar

to professional Dolby Stereo decoders used in many movie

theaters. By using the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, you

can experience the dramatic realism and impact of Dolby

Surround movie theater sound in your own home. Dolby Pro

Logic employs a four channel five speaker system. The Pro

Logic Surround system divides the input signal into four levels:

the left and right main channels, the center channel (used for

dialog), and the rear surround sound channels (used for sound

effects, background noise, and other ambient noises). The

center channel allows listeners seated in even less-than-ideal

positions to hear the dialog originating from the action on the

screen while experiencing good stereo imaging.

Dolby Surround is encoded on the sound track of pre-recorded

video tapes, laser discs, and some TV/cable broadcasts. When

you play a source encoded with Dolby Surround on this unit,

the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder decodes the signal and

distributes the surround-sound effects.

This Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder employs a digital signal

processing system. This system improves the stability of sound

at each channel and crosstalk between channels, so that

positioning of sounds around the room is more accurate

compared with conventional analog signal processing systems.

In addition, this unit features a built-in automatic input balance

control. This always assures you the best performance without

manual adjustment.

Dolby Digital

The built-in Dolby Digital decoder leads you into a totally new

sound experiences.

Dolby Digital is a new generation of multi-channel digital audio

technology, or the newest spatial sound processing format

developed for 35 mm film-movies by employing a new kind of

low bit-rate audio coding.

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that provides

completely independent multi-channel audio to consumers. In

multi-channel form, Dolby Digital provides five full range

channels in what is sometimes referred to as a “3/2” configura-

tion: three front channels (left, center and right), plus two

surround channels. A sixth bass-only effect channel is also

provided for output of LFE (low frequency effect), or low bass

effects that are independent of other channels. This channel is

counted as 0.1, thus giving rise to the term 5.1 channels in

total.

Compared to Dolby Pro Logic that is referred to a “3/1” system

(left front, center, right front and just one surround channel),

Dolby Digital features two surround channels, called stereo or

split surrounds, each offering the same full range fidelity as the

three front channels.

Sound of wide dynamic range reproduced by the five full range

channels presents listeners much excitement that has never

been experienced before. Precise sound orientation by the

discrete digital sound processing expands realism that the

original movie possesses.

LD and DVD are home audio formats that could benefit from

Dolby Digital. In the near future, Dolby Digital will also be

applied to DBS, CATV and HDTV. The ongoing release of

Dolby Stereo Digital theatrical films now underway will provide

an immediate source of Dolby Digital encoded video software.

01RX-V595-e/f1 6/23/99, 4:09 PM7

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing

Corporation. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

The following original functions make the surround-sound effect

of Dolby Digital become the most suitable for your audio

system and the listening conditions.

• Dynamic range (sound scale) of source can be changed

so that it will be suitable for the listening conditions.

• Output of low bass from any channel can be assigned to

either the MAIN SPEAKERS terminals or SUBWOOFER

terminal to maximize system performance.

• Output of LFE can be assigned to either the MAIN

SPEAKERS terminals or SUBWOOFER terminal to

maximize system performance.

Dolby Surround + DSP (CINEMA DSP)

Dolby Surround sound system shows its full ability in a large

movie theater, because movie sounds are originally designed to

be reproduced in a large movie theater using many speakers.

It is difficult to create a sound environment similar to that of a

movie theater in your listening room, because the room size,

materials of inside walls, the number of speakers, etc. of your

listening room is much different from those of a movie theater.

YAMAHA DSP technology made it possible to present you with

nearly the same sound experience as that of a large movie

theater in your listening room by compensating for lack of

presence and dynamics in your listening room with its original

digital sound fields combined with Dolby Surround sound field.

CINEMA DSP

The YAMAHA “CINEMA DSP” logo indicates those programs

are created by the combination of Dolby Surround and

YAMAHA DSP technology.

Dolby Pro Logic + 2 Digital Sound Fields

Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and the

rear surround side of the Dolby Pro Logic Surround-decoded

sound field respectively. They create a wide acoustic

environment and emphasize surround-effect in the room,

letting you feel much presence as if you are watching a

movie in a popular Dolby Stereo theater.

This combination is available when the sound field program

DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED/DOLBY DIGITAL

ENHANCED, 70 mm MOVIE THEATER/DIGITAL MOVIE

THEATER or TV SPORTS is selected, and the input signal of

source is analog, PCM audio or encoded with the Dolby

Digital in 2-channel.

Dolby Digital + 3 Digital Sound Fields

Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and the

independent left and right surround sides of the Dolby Digital-

decoded sound field respectively. They create a wide

acoustic environment and much surround effect in the room

without losing high channel separation. With wide dynamic

range of Dolby Digital sound, this sound field combination lets

you feel as if you are watching a movie in the newest Dolby

Stereo Digital theater. This will be the most ideal home

theater sound at the present time.

This combination is available when the sound field program

DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED/DOLBY DIGITAL

ENHANCED, 70 mm MOVIE THEATER/DIGITAL MOVIE

THEATER or TV SPORTS is selected, and the input signal of

source is encoded with the Dolby Digital (except in 2-chan-

nel).

01RX-V595-e/f1 6/23/99, 4:09 PM8

English

CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

FRONT PANEL

1 STANDBY/ON

Press this switch to turn the power of this unit on. Press it

again to turn this unit into the standby mode.

Standby mode

In this state, this unit consumes a very small quantity of

power to receive infrared-signals from the remote control

transmitter.

2 Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote control transmitter.

3 Display

Shows various information. (For details, refer to page 11.)

4 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Press this button to store the broadcasting stations.

When this button is pressed and held for more than three

seconds, the automatic preset tuning begins.

5 EDIT

This button is used to exchange the places of two preset

stations with each other.

6 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

Press this button to switch the tuning mode to automatic or

manual. To select the automatic tuning mode, press this button

so that the “AUTO TUNING” indicator lights up on the display.

To select the manual tuning mode, press this button so that the

“AUTO TUNING” indicator goes off.

7 FM/AM

Press this button to switch the reception band to FM or AM.

8 TUNING UP/DOWN

This button is used for tuning. Press the UP side to tune in to

higher frequencies, and press the DOWN side to tune in to

lower frequencies.

9 TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER

Press this button to play a tape or an MD. The “TAPE/MD

MON” indicator lights up on the display.

When you press the button next, the “TAPE/MD MON” indicator

goes off and “EXT. DECDR” appears on the display and you

can play the signal connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER

INPUT terminals.

0 INPUT

Turn this selector to select the program source (VCR, VIDEO

AUX, TV/DBS, DVD/LD, CD, TUNER, PHONO) to listen to or

watch.

The name of the selected program source appears on the

display.

01RX-V595-e/f1 6/23/99, 4:09 PM9

q INPUT MODE

Switches the DVD/LD and TV/DBS input signal mode (AUTO/

ANALOG).

w VOLUME

This control is used to raise or lower the volume level.

e PHONES jack

When you use headphones, connect the headphones to the

PHONES jack. You can listen to the sound to be output from

the main speakers through headphones.

When using headphones only, set both SPEAKERS A and B to

the OFF position and switch off the digital sound field processor

(so that no DSP program name appears on the display) by

pressing EFFECT.

PHONES

r SPEAKERS

Set A or B (or both A and B) to the ON position for the main

speaker system (connected to this unit) you will use. Set it (or

them) for the main speaker system you will not use to the OFF

position.

t A/B/C/D/E

Press this button to select a group (A to E) of preset stations.

y Preset station number selector

Select a preset station number (1 to 8).

u Tone controls

These controls are effective only for the sound from the main

speakers.

BASS

Used to increase or decrease the low frequency response. The

“0” position produces flat response.

TREBLE

Used to increase or decrease the high frequency response.

The “0” position produces flat response.

i BALANCE

This control is effective only for the sound from the main

speakers.

Adjusts the balance of the output volume to the left and right

speakers to compensate for sound imbalance caused by

speaker location or listening room conditions.

o TIME/LEVEL

Press this button to select the setting of delay time or speaker

output levels in the TIME/LEVEL mode.

p +/–

These buttons are used to adjust settings of the SET MENU

mode and the TIME/LEVEL mode. In the TIME LEVEL mode,

press + to increase delay time or speaker output levels. Press

– to decrease delay time or speaker output levels.

a SET MENU

Press this button to select functions in the SET MENU mode.

s PROGRAM selector

Press

or to select the DSP program.

The name of the selected program appears on the display.

d EFFECT

Switches on and off the output from the center and rear

speakers so that the sound becomes normal 2-channel.

* Even if the output from the center and rear speakers is off,

when the Dolby Digital is decoded, the signals at all channels

are distributed to the main channels and output from the main

speakers.

f VIDEO AUX terminals

Connect an auxiliary video or audio input source unit such as a

camcorder to these terminals. The source connected to these

terminals can be selected by INPUT.

01RX-V595-e/f1 6/23/99, 4:09 PM10

English

1 Multi-information display

Displays various information, for example station frequency,

preset station number and name of selected input source.

2 MEMORY indicator

When MEMORY is pressed, this indicator flashes for about five

seconds. During this period, the displayed station can be

stored to the memory.

3 AUTO TUNING indicator

Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.

4 TAPE/MD MON indicator

Lights up when the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.) is selected as

the input source by pressing TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER

on the front panel or TAPE/MD on the remote control transmitter.

5 STEREO indicator

Lights up when an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal

strength is received.

DISPLAY PANEL

Signal-level meter

Indicates the signal level of the received station.

If multipath interference is detected, the indication decreases.

7 , and indicators

“

” lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital decoder is

on and the signals of selected source encoded with the Dolby

Digital is not in 2-channel. “

” lights up when the built-in

digital sound field processor is on, and “

” lights up

when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder is on.

Depending on the selected DSP program, both “

” and

“

”, or both “ ” and “ ” will light up.

8 SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the built-in SLEEP timer is functioning.

01RX-V595-e/f1 6/23/99, 4:09 PM11

SPEAKER SETUP

This unit is designed to provide the best sound-field quality with

a 5-speaker configuration, using main speakers, rear speakers

and a center speaker.

The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus

the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from

your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for

the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for

the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is

not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it.

Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.

The main speakers should be high performance models and

have enough power handling capacity to accept the maximum

output of your audio system.

Other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers.

For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use high

performance models that can reproduce sounds in the full

range for the center speaker and the rear speakers.

5-Speaker Configuration

This configuration is the most effective and recommended one.

When playing back a source using the DSP program,

DOLBY PRO LOGIC/DOLBY DIGITAL, DOLBY PRO LOGIC

ENHANCED/DOLBY DIGITAL ENHANCED, 70 mm MOVIE

THEATER/DIGITAL MOVIE THEATER, MONO MOVIE or TV

SPORTS, or when playing back a source which contains

center-channel signals (dialog, vocals, etc.) using any DSP

program with the Dolby Digital decoded, conversations will be

output from the center speaker and the ambience will be

excellent.

Note: Set the CNTR (CENTER SPEAKER) mode to the

“LARGE” or “SMALL” position. (For details, see

page 22.)

SPEAKER CONFIGURATION

Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field

It is also possible to further expand your system with the

addition of a subwoofer and amplifier. The use of a subwoofer

is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or

all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low frequency

effect) sound with high fidelity when playing back a source with

the Dolby Digital decoded. You may wish to choose the

convenience of a YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer

System, which has its own built-in power amplifier.

4-Speaker Configuration

The center speaker is not used in this configuration. When

playing back a source using the DSP program, DOLBY PRO

LOGIC/DOLBY DIGITAL, DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED/

DOLBY DIGITAL ENHANCED, 70 mm MOVIE THEATER/

DIGITAL MOVIE THEATER, MONO MOVIE or TV SPORTS, or

when playing back a source which contains center-channel

signals (dialog, vocals, etc.) using any DSP program with the

Dolby Digital decoded, the center sound is output from the left

and the right main speakers. However, the sound effect of

other programs will be the same as that of the 5-speaker

configuration.

Note: Be sure to set the CNTR (CENTER SPEAKER) mode to

the “NONE” position. (For details, see page 22.)

Main L Center Main R

Surround sound

Dialog

Surround sound

Rear L

Rear R

Main L Main R

Surround sound

Dialog

Surround sound

Rear L Rear R

SPEAKERS TO BE USED

01RX-V595-e/f2 6/23/99, 4:09 PM12

English

SPEAKER PLACEMENT

When you place the speakers, refer to the following diagram:

Main: The position of your present stereo speaker

system.

Rear: Behind your listening position, facing slightly

inward. Nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet) up from the

floor.

Center: Precisely between the main speakers. (To avoid

interference with TV sets, use a magnetically

shielded speaker.)

Subwoofer: The position of the subwoofer is not so critical

because low bass tones are not highly directional.

Main speaker

Center speaker Rear speaker

Subwoofer

01RX-V595-e/f2 6/23/99, 4:09 PM13

CONNECTIONS

Never plug in this unit and other components until all connections are completed.

CONNECTIONS WITH OTHER COMPONENTS

When making connections between this unit and other components, be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L

(left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Also, refer to the owner’s manual for each component to be connected to this unit.

* If you have YAMAHA components numbered as !, #, $, etc. on the rear panel, connections can be made easily by making sure

to connect the output (or input) terminals of each component to the same-numbered terminals of this unit.

, : See the next page.

Turntable Monitor TV DVD player, LD player, etc.

CD player Tape deck,

MD recorder, etc.

TV/DBS tuner VCR

(Video cassette recorder)

To AC outlet

(U.S.A. model)

UAL FOR CORRECT SETTING.

Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT

DIGITAL SIGNAL

MAIN CENTER

SURROUND

COAXIAL

DVD/LD

OPTICAL

DVD/LD TV/DBS

SUB WOOFER

GND

MONITOR

OUT

DVD/LD TV/DBS

VIDEO SIGNAL

AUDIO SIGNAL OUTPUT

IN OUT

VCR

DVD/LD

SUB

WOOFER

TAPE/MD

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

CDPHONO TV/DBS

IN OUT

VCR

REAR

(SORROUND)

MAINS

MAIN

A OR B: 4

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A + B: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER:

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 6

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN

A OR B: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A + B:I6

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER:

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

100W MAX. TOTAL

01RX-V595-e/f2 6/23/99, 4:09 PM14

English

6CH DISCRETE OUTPUT

MAIN CENTER

SURROUND

SUB

WOOFER

Ω

UNBAL.

EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT

DIGITAL SIGNAL

MAIN CENTER

SURROUND

COAXIAL

DVD/LD

OPTICAL

DVD/LD TV/DBS

SUB WOOFER

GND

MONITOR

OUT

DVD/LD TV/DBS

VIDEO SIGNAL

AUDIO SIGNAL OUTPUT

IN OUT

VCR

DVD/LD

SUB

WOOFER

TAPE/MD

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

CDPHONO TV/DBS

IN OUT

VCR

ANT

GND

SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S)

(U.S.A., Canada, Singapore, China and General models)

........................................................... 2 SWITCHED OUTLETS

(Australia model) ...................................1 SWITCHED OUTLET

Use these to connect the power cords from your components to

this unit.

The power to the SWITCHED outlets is controlled by this unit’s

STANDBY/ON or the provided remote control transmitter’s

POWER and STANDBY. These outlets will supply power to

any component whenever this unit is turned on.

The maximum power (total power consumption of components)

that can be connected to the SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S) is

100 watts.

GND terminal (For turntable use)

Connecting the ground wire of the turntable to the GND

terminal will normally minimize hum, but in some cases better

results may be obtained with the ground wire disconnected.

CONNECTING TO AN EXTERNAL DECODER

When using the DTS or other decoder with 6-channel discrete outputs, connect the 6CH DISCRETE OUTPUT terminals of the

decoder to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals of this unit.

DTS or other decoder with 6-channel

discrete outputs

DVD player, LD player or other

unit with digital outputs

(U.S.A. model)

01RX-V595-e/f2 6/23/99, 4:09 PM15

CONNECTING TO DIGITAL (COAXIAL AND/OR OPTICAL) TERMINALS

If your DVD (LD) player, TV/DBS tuner, etc. are equipped with

coaxial or optical digital audio signal output terminals, they can

be connected to this unit’s COAXIAL and/or OPTICAL digital

signal input terminals.

To make a connection between optical digital audio signal

terminals, remove the cover from each terminal, and then

connect them by using a commercially available optical fiber

cable that conforms to EIAJ standards. Other cables might not

function correctly.

Even if you connect an audio/video unit to the COAXIAL (or

OPTICAL) terminal of this unit, you must keep the unit con-

nected with the same named analog audio signal terminals of

this unit, because digital signal cannot be recorded by a tape

deck or VCR connected to this unit. You can switch the

selection of input signals between “digital” and “analog” easily.

(See page 29 for details.)

Notes

• When connecting an audio/video unit to both of the digital

and analog terminals of this unit, make sure to connect to

both terminals of the same name.

• Be sure to attach the covers when the OPTICAL terminals

are not being used, in order to protect the terminals from

dust.

• The input signal from the DVD/LD input terminals is selected

in the following order of priority.

(input mode: AUTO position)

1 COAXIAL terminal

2 OPTICAL terminal

3 ANALOG terminal

• All digital audio signal input terminals are applicable to the

sampling frequency of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz.

DVD or LD player TV/DBS tuner

(U.S.A. model)

Ω

UNBAL.

EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT

DIGITAL SIGNAL

MAIN CENTER

SURROUND

COAXIAL

DVD/LD

OPTICAL

DVD/LD TV/DBS

SUB WOOFER

GND

MONITOR

OUT

DVD/LD TV/DBS

VIDEO SIGNAL

AUDIO SIGNAL OUTPUT

IN OUT

VCR

DVD/LD

SUB

WOOFER

TAPE/MD

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

CDPHONO TV/DBS

IN OUT

VCR

ANT

GND

01RX-V595-e/f2 6/23/99, 4:09 PM16

English

Camcorder

CONNECTING TO VIDEO AUX TERMINALS (ON THE FRONT PANEL)

These terminals are used to connect any video input source, such as a camcorder, to this unit.

VIDEO

AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

VIDEO

01RX-V595-e/f2 6/23/99, 4:09 PM17

CAUTION

SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR CORRECT SETTING.

REAR

(SORROUND)

CENTER

MAIN

SUB

WOOFER

OUTPUT

SPEAKERS

Note

Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the

rear panel of this unit.

Note on main speaker connections:

One or two speaker systems can be connected to this unit. If

you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the

SPEAKERS A or B terminals.

Note on a subwoofer connection:

You may wish to add a subwoofer to reinforce low frequencies

or to output low bass sound from the subwoofer channel.

If you have a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect

the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal of this unit to the input

terminal of the subwoofer system.

If you have an amplifier and a subwoofer, connect the

SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal of this unit to the input

terminal of the subwoofer amplifier, and then connect the

speaker terminals of the subwoofer amplifier to the subwoofer.

When the input signals to this unit are in normal 2-channel

stereo, this terminal outputs only frequencies below 90 Hz from

the main and center channels. When discrete signals are input

to this unit and are selected as the input source, this terminal

outputs signals from the subwoofer channel.

Note on center speaker connection:

Center speaker can be connected to this unit. Place it on or

under the TV.

CONNECTING SPEAKERS

Rear speakers

Subwoofer system

Center speaker

Right

Left

Main speakers A Main speakers B

Right

Left

Right Left

(U.S.A. model)

01RX-V595-e/f2 6/23/99, 4:09 PM18

English

How to connect

Connect the SPEAKERS terminals to your speakers with wire of the proper gauge, cut as short as possible. If the connections are

faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers. Make sure that the polarity of the speaker wires is correct, that is the + and –

markings are observed. If these wires are reversed, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass.

Caution

Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could

damage this unit and/or speakers.

For connecting to the MAIN SPEAKERS

terminals

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

1 Unscrew the knob.

2 Insert the bare wire.

[Remove approx. 5 mm

(1/4”) insulation from the

speaker wires.]

3 Tighten the knob and

secure the wire.

1 Press the tab.

2 Insert the bare wire.

[Remove approx. 5 mm

(1/4”) insulation from

the speaker wires.]

3 Release the tab and

secure the wire.

For connecting to the REAR and CENTER

SPEAKERS terminals

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Banana plug connections are also possible (except for

Singapore model). Simply insert the banana plug connector

into the corresponding terminal.

01RX-V595-e/f2 6/23/99, 4:09 PM19

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SWITCH

Select the position whose requirements your speaker system

meets.

(Upper position)

Main: If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 4Ω or higher.

If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance

of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher.

Center: The impedance of the speaker must be 6Ω or higher.

Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 6Ω or higher.

(Lower position)

Main: If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 8Ω or higher.

If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance

of each speaker must be 16Ω or higher.

Center: The impedance of the speaker must be 8Ω or higher.

Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher.

WARNING

Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting

while the power of this unit is on, otherwise this unit may be

damaged.

IF THIS UNIT FAILS TO TURN ON WHEN THE STANDBY/

ON SWITCH IS PRESSED, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

switch may not be fully set to either end. If so, set the switch

to either end fully.

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

(U.S.A. model)

SWITCHED

100W MAX. TOTAL

MAINS

MAIN

A OR B: 4

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A + B: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER:

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 6

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN

A OR B: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A + B:I6

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER:

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

AC OUTLETS

01RX-V595-e/f2 6/23/99, 4:09 PM20

English

ANTENNA CONNECTIONS

Each antenna should be correctly connected to the designated terminals, referring to the following diagram.

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas will probably provide sufficient signal

strength. Nevertheless, a properly installed outdoor antenna will give clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor

reception quality, an outdoor antenna may result in improvement.

Connecting the AM loop antenna

* The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. The antenna may be hung on a wall.

* The AM loop antenna always should be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

GND TERMINAL

For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the

GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a

metal stake driven into moist earth.

Notes

• When connecting the indoor FM

antenna, insert its connector into the

FM ANT terminal firmly.

• If you need an outdoor FM antenna

to improve FM reception quality,

either 300-ohm feeder or coaxial

cable may be used. In locations

troubled by electrical interference, coaxial cable is preferable.

Orient so that the best

reception is obtained.

12 3

Outdoor FM antenna

75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter

75-ohm coaxial cable

75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter

300-ohm feeder

Ground

AM loop

antenna

(included)

Outdoor AM antenna

Indoor FM

antenna

(included)

Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

PHONO

ANT

GND

(U.S.A. model)

01RX-V595-e/f2 6/23/99, 4:09 PM21

ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE USING THIS UNIT

SELECTING THE OUTPUT MODES

This unit provides you the following five functions to determine the method of distributing output signals to speakers suitable for

your audio system. When speaker connections are all completed, select a proper position on each function to make the best use of

your speaker system. (See “ADJUSTMENTS IN THE ‘SET MENU’ MODE” on page 43.)

1. CNTR (CENTER SPEAKER) 2. REAR (REAR SPEAKER) 3. MAIN (MAIN SPEAKER)

4. BASS (LFE/BASS OUT) 5. M.LVL (MAIN LEVEL)

DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION

1. CNTR (CENTER SPEAKER)

Choices: LARGE/SMALL/NONE

Preset position: LARGE

LARGE: Select this position when your center speaker is

approximately the same size as the main speakers.

SMALL: Select this position when you use a center speaker

that is smaller than the main speakers.

In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the

center channel are output from the main speakers (or

the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal if the SMALL

position is selected on “3. MAIN” and the SW position

is selected on “4. BASS”).

NONE: Select this position when you do not have a center

speaker. The center channel sound will be output

from the left and right main speakers.

2. REAR (REAR SPEAKER)

Choices: LARGE/SMALL

Preset position: LARGE

LARGE: Select this position if your rear speakers have a high

ability for bass reproduction, or a subwoofer is

connected to the rear speaker in parallel.

In this position, full range signals are output from the

rear speakers.

SMALL: Select this position if your rear speakers do not have

a high ability for bass reproduction.

In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the

rear channels are output from the SUBWOOFER

OUTPUT terminal (or the main speakers if the MAIN

position is selected on “4. BASS”).

3. MAIN (MAIN SPEAKER)

Choices: LARGE/SMALL

Preset position: LARGE

LARGE: Select this position if your main speakers have a

high ability for bass reproduction.

In this position, full range signals present at the main

channels are output from the main speakers.

SMALL: Select this position if your main speakers do not

have a high ability for bass reproduction. However, if

your system does not include a subwoofer, do not

select this position.

In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the

main channels are output from the SUBWOOFER

OUTPUT terminal if the SW or BOTH position is

selected on “4. BASS”.

4. BASS (LFE/BASS OUT)

Choices: SW/MAIN/BOTH

Preset position: SW

MAIN: Select this position if your system does not include a

subwoofer.

In this position, full range signals present at the main

channels, signals from the LFE channel and other

low bass signals that are selected on “1. CNTR” to

“3. MAIN” to be distributed from other channels are

output from the main speakers.

SW/BOTH:

Select either the SW or BOTH position if your

system includes a subwoofer.

In either position, signals at LFE channel and other

low bass signals that are selected on “1. CNTR” to

“3. MAIN” to be distributed from other channels are

output from the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal.

When the LARGE position is selected on “3. MAIN”,

in the SW position, no signal is distributed from the

main channels to the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT

terminal, however in the BOTH position, low bass

signals from the main channels are output to both of

the main speakers and the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT

terminal.

5. M.LVL (MAIN LEVEL)

Choices: NORMAL (NRML)/–10 dB

Preset position: NORMAL (NRML)

NORMAL (NRML):

Normally select this position.

–10 dB: Select this position if the sound output from the main

speakers is too loud and cannot be balanced with

the sound output from the center and rear speakers.

In this position, the sound output from the main

speakers is attenuated.

01RX-V595-e/f2 6/23/99, 4:09 PM22

English

ADJUSTING METHOD

Operations should be made while watching the information on this unit’s display.

If you are using the remote control transmitter, set the

SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN or DSP position on the

remote control transmitter.

1 Turn the power on.

Front panel Remote control

2 Press SET MENU once or more to select the title

“1. CNTR” (so that “CNTR” appears on the display).

Front panel Remote control

* After pressing SET MENU once on the remote control

transmitter, you can also select the title by pressing

(Pressing

goes back one selection.)

Appears.

3 Press + or – once or more to select the position you

want.

Front panel Remote control

Changes.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change selections on

“2. REAR”, “3. MAIN”, “4. BASS” and/or “5. M.LVL” in

the same way.

1 2

01RX-V595-e/f2 6/23/99, 4:10 PM23

SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT

This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level balance between the main, center and rear speakers using the built-in test

tone generator. When this adjustment is performed, the sound output level heard at the listening position will be the same from

each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, the Dolby Digital decoder and the

Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder.

The adjustment of each speaker output level should be done at your listening position with the remote control transmitter.

After completing the adjustment of the output level for each speaker, use VOLUME (

) on the remote control transmit-

ter at your listening position to check if the adjustments are satisfactory.

Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN or DSP position

on the remote control transmitter.

1 Set VOLUME to the “∞” position.

Front panel

2 Turn the power on.

Front panel Remote control

3 Select the main speakers to be used.

Front panel

* If you use two main speaker systems, press both A and B.

5,9

2 1

4,74

01RX-V595-e/f2 6/23/99, 4:10 PM24

English

6 Turn up the volume.

Remote control

You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from the left main

speaker, then the center speaker, then the right main

speaker, then the right rear speaker, and then the left rear

speaker, for about two seconds each. The display changes

as shown below.

* If the function “1. CNTR” in the SET MENU mode is set to

the NONE position, you will hear the center channel test

tone from the left and right main speakers.

7 Adjust BALANCE so that the sound output level of the

left main speaker and the right main speaker is the

same.

Front panel

Main (L)

Center

Main (R)

Rear (R)

Rear (L)

4 Set BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE to the “0” position.

Front panel

5 Press TEST (so that “TEST LEFT” appears on the

display).

Remote control

Appears.

01RX-V595-e/f2 6/23/99, 4:10 PM25

8 Adjust the sound output levels of the center speaker

and the rear speakers so that they become almost as

same as that of the main speakers.

Remote control

a) Press or once or more so that “CENTER”, “R SUR.”

or “L SUR.” appears on the display.

* Select “CENTER” to adjust the output level of the

center speaker and select “R SUR.” or “L SUR.” to

adjust the output level of the rear speakers.

Remote control

b) Adjust the level.

* Pressing

raises and lowers the level.

* While adjusting, the test tone is fixed on the selected

speaker.

Remote control

9 Press TEST once more to cancel the test tone.

Remote control

“TEST” disappears.

Notes

• Once you have completed these adjustments, you can adjust

the overall sound level on your audio system by using

VOLUME (or VOLUME (

) on the remote control

transmitter) only.

• If you use external power amplifiers, you may also use their

volume controls to achieve the proper balance.

• If the function “1. CNTR” in the SET MENU mode is set to the

NONE position, the sound output level of the center speaker

cannot be adjusted in step 8. The center sound is automati-

cally output from the left and right main speakers.

• If there is insufficient sound output from the center and rear

speakers, you may decrease the main speaker output level

by setting “5. M.LVL” to “–10 dB”.

01RX-V595-e/f2 6/23/99, 4:10 PM26

English

3 Select the desired input source by using INPUT.

(For video sources, turn the TV/monitor ON.)

See page 29 if you are using an external decoder or

playing a tape or an MD.

Front panel Remote control

The name of the selected input source will appear on the

display.

BASIC OPERATIONS

TO PLAY A SOURCE

Notes

• Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN position on the remote control transmitter.

• To operate the CD player, DVD/LD player, tape deck, MD recorder, or other components using this remote control transmitter, set

the SELECTOR DIAL to the component to be used. (See “SETUP CODES” on page 50.)

1 Set VOLUME to the “∞” position.

Front panel

2 Turn the power on.

Front panel Remote control

5 4

3 1,7

3,4

01RX-V595-e/f3 6/23/99, 4:10 PM27

8 If desired, adjust BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, etc.

(see below) and use the digital sound field processor.

(see page 37.)

Selecting the SPEAKER system

Because one or two speaker systems (as main speakers) can

be connected to this unit, SPEAKERS allow you to select

speaker system A or B, or both at once.

Adjusting the BALANCE control

Adjust the balance of the output volume from the left and right

speakers to compensate for sound imbalances caused by

speaker location or listening room conditions.

Note

This control is effective only for the sound from the main

speakers.

Adjusting the BASS and TREBLE controls

BASS: Turn this clockwise to increase (or counter-clockwise

to decrease) the low frequency response.

TREBLE

: Turn this clockwise to increase (or counter-clockwise

to decrease) the high frequency response.

Note

These controls are effective only for the sound from the main

speakers.

4 For the DVD/LD or TV/DBS source, the current input

mode is also shown.

* To change the input mode for the DVD/LD or TV/DBS

source, press INPUT MODE (or the button that you

have pressed to select the input source in step 3 on

the remote control transmitter) once or more until the

desired input mode (AUTO or ANALOG) is shown on

the display. (See page 29 for details on switching the

input mode.)

Front panel Remote control

Input mode

5 Select the main speakers to be used.

Front panel

* If you use two main speaker systems, press both A and B.

6 Play the source. (For detailed information on tuning,

see page 31.)

7 Adjust the volume to the desired output level.

Front panel Remote control

01RX-V595-e/f3 6/23/99, 4:10 PM28

English

To play a tape or an MD

Press TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER so that the “TAPE/MD

MON” indicator lights up on the display, then play the tape or MD.

Front panel Remote control

To stop playing the tape or MD, press TAPE/MD MON / EXT.

DECODER twice so that the “TAPE/MD MON” indicator and

“EXT. DECDR” disappear from the display and the play stops

(or press TAPE/MD once on the remote control transmitter).

To use a decoder connected to the EXTERNAL

DECODER INPUT terminals

Press TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER once or more so that

the “EXT. DECDR” appears on the display.

Start the play by operating the DTS or other external decoder,

DVD player or LD player.

Front panel Remote control

To stop playing, press TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER once

so that “EXT. DECDR” disappears from the display and the play

stops (or press EXT. DEC. on the remote control transmitter).

When you finish using this unit

Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel again or STANDBY on

the remote control transmitter to turn this unit into the standby

mode.

Notes on using INPUT

• By using INPUT, you can select the program sources

connected to the input terminals on the rear panel.

• To play a video source connected to the VIDEO AUX

terminals on the front panel, set INPUT to the VIDEO AUX

position.

• The audio source selected by INPUT will not be played if the

“TAPE/MD MON” indicator lights up or if “EXT. DECDR” is

displayed.

• If you select INPUT for a video source without canceling the

selection of TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER on the front

panel (or, TAPE/MD or EXT. DEC. on the remote control

transmitter), the playback result will be the video image from

the video source and the sound from the input source

selected by TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER on the front

panel (or, TAPE/MD or EXT. DEC. on the remote control

transmitter).

• Once you play a video source, its video image will not be

interrupted even if INPUT for an audio source is selected.

• When you select an input source by using INPUT, the DSP

program (or no DSP program) that was used when the same

input source was selected the last time, will be automatically

recalled.

Switching the input mode

(for DVD/LD and TV/DBS)

This unit allows you to switch the input mode only for sources

connected to the DVD/LD and TV/DBS input terminals (on the

rear panel of this unit) that input two or three types of signals.

The following two input modes are provided.

AUTO: For the source connected to the DVD/LD input

terminals:

This mode is automatically selected when you turn the

power of this unit on. In this mode, input signal is

automatically selected in the following order of priority.

1. Digital input signal from the COAXIAL terminal

2. Digital input signal from the OPTICAL terminal

3. Analog input signal

For the source connected to the TV/DBS input

terminals:

This mode is selected when you turn the power of this

unit on if the AUTO position is selected on “10. INPUT”

in the SET MENU mode. (For details, see page 44.)

In this mode, input signal is automatically selected in

the following order of priority.

1. Digital input signal from the OPTICAL terminal

2. Analog input signal

ANALOG:

In this mode, only analog input signal is selected even

if a digital signal is input at the same time.

Select this mode when you want to use the analog

input signal instead of the digital input signal.

Notes on input mode selection

• To playback a source with the Dolby Digital-decoded, set the

input mode to AUTO.

• For the TV/DBS source only, the input mode selected on the

function “10. INPUT” in the SET MENU mode is effective

when you turn the power of this unit on.

• When you want to enjoy a source which has normal

2-channel signals with a Dolby Pro Logic Surround program,

select the ANALOG mode.

• In the AUTO mode, there may be a case depending on some

LD players or DVD players that when you make a search on

a source encoded with the Dolby Digital during the play and

then the play is restored, sound output is interrupted for a

moment because the digital input signal is selected again.

01RX-V595-e/f3 6/23/99, 4:10 PM29

1 Select the source to be recorded.

Front panel Remote control

2 Play the source and then turn VOLUME up to confirm

the input source. (For detailed information on tuning,

see page 31.)

Front panel Remote control

3 Begin recording on the tape deck, MD recorder or VCR

connected to this unit.

TO RECORD A SOURCE TO TAPE OR MD

4 1 2

1,4

4 When the tape deck or MD recorder is used for

recording, you can monitor the sounds being recorded

by pressing TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER so that

the “TAPE/MD MON” indicator lights up on the display.

Front panel Remote control

Notes

• The settings of DSP and VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE and

BALANCE have no effect on the material being recorded.

• A source that is connected to this unit through digital

terminals only cannot be recorded by a tape deck or VCR

connected to this unit.

• Please check the copyright laws in your country to record

from records, compact discs, radio, etc. Recording of

If you watch a video software that uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, there may

be a case that the picture itself will be affected by those

signals.

01RX-V595-e/f3 6/23/99, 4:10 PM30

English

AUTOMATIC TUNING

1 Select the reception band (FM or AM) confirming it on

the display.

Front panel

2 Press TUNING MODE (so that the “AUTO TUNING”

indicator lights up on the display).

Front panel

Lights up.

3 To tune in to a higher frequency, press the UP side of

TUNING once.

To tune in to a lower frequency, press the DOWN side

of TUNING once.

Front panel

* If the station where the tuning search stops is not the

desired one, press once more.

* If the tuning search does not stop at the desired station

(because the signal from the station is weak), operate the

manual tuning procedure.

TUNING OPERATIONS

Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN position on the remote control transmitter and select the tuner by using INPUT.

Normally, if station signals are strong and there is no interference, quick automatic-search tuning (AUTOMATIC TUNING) is

possible. However, if the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually (MANUAL TUNING).

MANUAL TUNING

1 Select the reception band (FM or AM) confirming it on

the display.

Front panel

2 Press TUNING MODE.

Front panel

3 Tune in to the desired station manually.

Front panel

* To continue the tuning search, press and hold the button.

Note

• If you tune in to an FM station manually, it is received in

monaural mode automatically to increase the signal quality.

Confirm that the “AUTO

TUNING’’ indicator goes

off.

01RX-V595-e/f3 6/23/99, 4:10 PM31

MANUAL PRESET TUNING

This unit can store station frequencies selected by tuning. With this function, you can recall any desired station simply by selecting

the preset station number with which it was stored. Up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) can be stored.

4 Select the preset station number with which you want to

store the station before the “MEMORY” indicator goes

off from the display.

Front panel

The displayed station has been stored to A1.

* In the same way, store other stations to A2, A3 ... A8.

* You can store more stations to preset station numbers in

other groups in the same way by selecting other groups in

step 2.

To store stations

1 Tune in to the desired station.

(See the previous page for tuning procedure.)

2 Press A/B/C/D/E once or more to select the desired

group (A to E) of preset stations confirming it on the

display.

Front panel Remote control

3 Press MEMORY (so that the “MEMORY” indicator

flashes for about five seconds).

Front panel

Flashes.

2,1 4,2

2,1

01RX-V595-e/f3 6/23/99, 4:10 PM32

English

To recall a preset station

(See the illustration on previous page.)

11 Select the group of preset stations.

Front panel Remote control

22 Select the preset station number.

Front panel Remote control

Notes

• A new setting can be stored in place of the former one.

• For presets, the setting of the reception mode (stereo or

monaural) is stored along with the station frequency.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from

being lost even if this unit is turned into the standby mode, or

the power plug is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power

is cut due to temporary power failure. If, however, the power is

cut for more than one week, the memory may be erased. If so,

it can be re-stored by simply following the preset tuning

procedures.

01RX-V595-e/f3 6/23/99, 4:10 PM33

To store stations

1 Select the FM.

Front panel

2 Press TUNING MODE (so that the “AUTO TUNING”

indicator lights up on the display).

Front panel

Lights up.

3 Press MEMORY and hold for about three seconds.

Front panel

Flashes.

AUTOMATIC PRESET TUNING (For FM stations only)

You can also make use of an automatic preset tuning function for FM stations only. Using this function, this unit performs automatic

tuning and sequentially stores FM stations with strong signals. Up to 40 stations are stored automatically in the same way as in the

manual preset tuning method on page 32. Note that a new setting can be stored in place of the former one.

4 To tune in to higher frequencies, press the UP side of

TUNING once.

To tune in to lower frequencies, press the DOWN side

of TUNING once.

Front panel

* If TUNING is not pressed, in a while, the automatic preset

tuning begins automatically toward higher frequencies.

The automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency

currently displayed. Received stations are stored to A1, A2

... A8 sequentially.

* If more than 8 stations are received, they are also stored

to the preset station numbers in other groups (B, C, D and

E) in that order.

If you want to store the first station received by the auto-

matic preset tuning to a desired preset station number.

For example, if you want to store the first received station to C5,

select “C5” while “A1”, the “MEMORY” indicator and the “AUTO

TUNING” indicator flash after pressing MEMORY in step 3. Then

press TUNING. The first received station is stored to C5, and

next stations to C6, C7 ... sequentially.

If stations are stored up to E8, automatic preset tuning stops

automatically.

When automatic preset tuning is finished

The display shows the frequency of the last preset station.

Check the contents and the number of preset stations by

following the procedures in the section “To recall a preset

station” on page 33.

01RX-V595-e/f3 6/23/99, 4:11 PM34

English

EXCHANGING PRESET STATIONS

You can exchange the places of two preset stations with each other as shown below.

Example

If you want to shift the preset station on E1 to A5, and vice versa.

1 Recall the preset station on E1 (by following the

procedures in the section “To recall a preset station” on

page 33).

2 Press EDIT.

Front Panel

Flashes.

3 Next, recall the preset station on A5 by following the

same procedures as in step 1.

Flashes.

4 Press EDIT once more.

Front Panel

Shows the exchange of

stations is completed.

2,4

Notes

• You can replace a preset station with another FM or AM station manually by simply following the procedures in the section “To

store stations” on page 32.

• Even if the number of received stations is not enough to be stored up to E8, the search is finished automatically after searching

all frequencies.

• With this function, only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically. If the station you want to store is weak

in signal strength, tune in to it in monaural manually and store it by following the procedures in the section “To store stations” on

page 32.

01RX-V595-e/f3 6/23/99, 4:11 PM35

SETTING THE SLEEP TIMER

If you use the SLEEP timer of this unit, you can make this unit automatically switch to the standby mode. When you are going to

sleep while enjoying a broadcast or other desired input source, this timer function is useful. The SLEEP timer can be controlled

only with the remote control transmitter.

Notes

• To set the SLEEP timer for this unit, set the SELECTOR DIAL to a position other than the TV postition. To set the SLEEP timer

for your TV, set the SELECTOR DIAL to the TV position.

• The components on which the SLEEP timer is effective are the sources connected to the SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S) on the rear

panel of this unit.

To set the SLEEP time

1 Press SLEEP once or more to select the desired

SLEEP time.

Remote control

Indicates the SLEEP time.

Flashes.

Whenever SLEEP is pressed, the SLEEP time will change

as follows.

(Minutes)

120 90 60 30

The SLEEP timer is off (SLEEP OFF).

(The state before SLEEP is

pressed.)

After a while, the “SLEEP” indicator lights up and the display

returns to the indication before the SLEEP timer was set.

2 The unit will be switched to the standby mode automati-

cally at the selected SLEEP time.

To cancel the selected SLEEP time

Remote control

Press SLEEP once or more so that “SLEEP OFF” appears on

the display. (It will soon disappear and the “SLEEP” indicator

will go off from the display.)

Note

The SLEEP timer setting can also be canceled by tuning this

unit into the standby mode with STANDBY/ON on the front

panel (or STANDBY on the remote control transmitter) or

disconnecting the power plug of this unit from the AC outlet.

01RX-V595-e/f3 6/23/99, 4:11 PM36

English

FEATURE

Reproduces video discs, video tapes and similar sources which

are Dolby Surround encoded and bear the “DOLBY SUR-

ROUND” logo.

The built-in Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder or Dolby Digital

decoder precisely reproduces sounds and sound effects of a

source encoded with Dolby Surround. The realization of a

highly efficient decoding process improves crosstalk and

channel separation and makes sound positioning smoother

and more precise.

Reproduces video discs, video tapes and similar sources which

are Dolby Surround encoded and bear the “DOLBY SUR-

ROUND” logo.

This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker

systems of the 35 mm film theater. The Dolby Surround

decoding and the digital sound field processing is precisely

performed without altering the original sound orientation. The

surround effects produced by this sound field folds around the

viewer naturally from the rear to the left and right and toward

the screen.

Note: If the main channel sound is considerably altered by

overadjustment of BASS or TREBLE, the relationship with the

rear channels may produce an unnatural effect.

Ideal for reproducing video discs, video tapes and similar

sources which are Dolby Surround encoded and bear the

“DOLBY SURROUND” logo.

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound

design of the newest 70 mm/Dolby Digital multi-track films.

The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest

movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself

are restrained as much as possible. The three dimensional

feeling of the sound field is emphasized, and dialog is precisely

oriented on the screen. You can enjoy watching Sci-Fi,

adventure movies, etc. with considerable presence.

No. PROGRAM

1 DOLBY PRO LOGIC (

)

Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM

audio, or encoded with the Dolby Digital in

2-channel.

Speaker output: main, center, rear

DOLBY DIGITAL (

)

Functions when the input signal is encoded with the

Dolby Digital (not in 2-channel).

Speaker output: main, center, rear

2 DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED

(

)

Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM

audio, or encoded with the Dolby Digital in

2-channel.

Speaker output: main, center, rear

DOLBY DIGITAL ENHANCED

(

)

Functions when the input signal is encoded with the

Dolby Digital (not in 2-channel).

Speaker output: main, center, rear

3 70 mm MOVIE THEATER

(

)

Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM

audio, or encoded with the Dolby Digital in

2-channel.

Speaker output: main, center, rear

DIGITAL MOVIE THEATER

(

)

Functions when the input signal is encoded with the

Dolby Digital (not in 2-channel).

Speaker output: main, center, rear

USING DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR

(

DSP

)

This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital sound field processor. The processor allows you to electronically

expand and change the shape of the audio sound field from both audio and video sources, creating a theater-like experience in

your listening room. You can create an excellent audio sound field by selecting a suitable sound field program (this will, of course,

depend on what you are listening to), and adding any desired adjustments.

The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most

of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. The data for these sound fields was recorded at actual

locations using sophisticated sound field measurement equipment.

Note

The channel level balance between the left and right rear speakers may vary depending on the sound field you are listen-

ing to. This is due to the fact that most of these sound field are re-creation of actual acoustic environments.

BRIEF OVERVIEW OF DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

01RX-V595-e/f4 6/23/99, 4:11 PM37

FEATURE

This program is designed specifically to enhance mono source

programs. Compared to a strictly mono setting, the sound

image created in this mode is wider and slightly forward of the

speaker pair, lending an immediacy to the overall sound. It is

particularly effective when used with old mono movies, news

broadcasting and dialog.

This program is furnished with a tight sound field in which the

sound will not spread excessively on the front side, but the rear

surround side produces a dynamic sound expansion. This

program is the most suitable for sports programs.

This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively

disco in the heart of a very lively city. The sound is dense and

highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy,

“immediate” sound.

This program is ideally suited for rock music. You will experi-

ence a very dynamic and lively sound field.

In this program, the center will appear to be deep behind the

main speakers, creating an expansive, large hall ambience.

Orchestra and opera music are suited to this sound field.

No. PROGRAM

4 MONO MOVIE

(

)

Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM

audio, or encoded with the Dolby Digital in

2-channel.

Speaker output: main, center, rear

(

)

Functions when the input signal is encoded with

the Dolby Digital (not in 2-channel).

Speaker output: main, center, rear

5 TV SPORTS

(

)

Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM

audio, or encoded with the Dolby Digital in

2-channel.

Speaker output: main, center, rear

(

)

Functions when the input signal is encoded with

the Dolby Digital (not in 2-channel).

Speaker output: main, center, rear

6 DISCO

(

)

Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM

audio, or encoded with the Dolby Digital in

2-channel.

Speaker output: main, rear

(

)

Functions when the input signal is encoded with

the Dolby Digital (not in 2-channel).

Speaker output: main, center, rear

7 ROCK CONCERT

(

)

Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM

audio, or encoded with the Dolby Digital in

2-channel.

Speaker output: main, rear

(

)

Functions when the input signal is encoded with

the Dolby Digital (not in 2-channel).

Speaker output: main, center, rear

8 CONCERT HALL

(

)

Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM

audio, or encoded with the Dolby Digital in

2-channel.

Speaker output: main, rear

(

)

Functions when the input signal is encoded with

the Dolby Digital (not in 2-channel).

Speaker output: main, center, rear

Note: When the NONE position is selected on “1. CNTR” in the SET MENU mode, no sound is output from the center speaker(s).

01RX-V595-e/f4 6/23/99, 4:11 PM38

English

PLAYING A SOURCE WITH THE DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR (DSP)

EFFECT

1 Follow steps 1 to 7 shown in “BASIC OPERATIONS” on

pages 27 to 28.

2 Select the desired DSP program that is suitable for the

source.

Front panel Remote control

Press DSP. While the indicator lights up for

about three seconds, select a DSP program

using the numeric buttons (1 to 8).

* If the SELECTOR DIAL is set to the DSP position, you

can also select a DSP program using the numeric buttons

(1 to 8).

The name of selected program appears on

the display.

3 If desired, adjust the delay time and the output level of

each speaker. (For details, see pages 41 and 42.)

Notes

• You can select the program for each of the input sources.

Once you select a program, it is linked with the input source

selected at that time. So, when you select the input source

next time, the same program is automatically called.

• If you prefer to cancel the DSP, press EFFECT or EFCT ON/

OFF. The sound will be the normal 2-channel stereo without

surround sound effect.

• When a monaural sound source is played with DOLBY PRO

LOGIC or DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED, no sound is

heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound

is heard only from the center speaker. However, if the NONE

position is selected on “1. CNTR” in the SET MENU mode,

the main speakers output the sound of the center channel.

• If the main-source sound is considerably altered by

overadjustment of BASS or TREBLE when this unit’s Dolby

Pro Logic Surround decoder or Dolby Digital decoder is used,

the relationship between the center and rear channels may

produce an unnatural effect.

01RX-V595-e/f4 6/23/99, 4:11 PM39

To enjoy a video source with the Dolby Pro

Logic Surround or Dolby Digital decoded

When you select the program DOLBY PRO LOGIC/DOLBY

DIGITAL, DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED/DOLBY DIGITAL

ENHANCED or 70 mm MOVIE THEATER/DIGITAL MOVIE

THEATER, and the input signal of the source is 2-channel

stereo, Dolby Pro Logic Surround is decoded. When some

program is selected and the input signal of the source is

encoded with Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital is automatically

decoded.

* The following indicators on the display show you what sound

processing is being made.

Lights up when the Dolby Digital is being decoded and the

input signals of selected source encoded with Dolby Digital is

not in 2-channel.

Lights up when the digital sound field

processor is turned on.

Lights up when the Dolby Pro Logic Surround is being

decoded.

* In addition, for the program DOLBY PRO LOGIC/DOLBY

DIGITAL, DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED/DOLBY

DIGITAL ENHANCED or 70 mm MOVIE THEATER/DIGITAL

MOVIE THEATER, the name of the program on the display

will change according to the type of decoding. (For details,

see page 37.)

Note

If the input signals of the source are encoded with Dolby Digital

in 2-channel only, the sound processing for them is similar to

that for analog or PCM audio signals.

To cancel the effect sound

EFFECT on the front panel and EFCT ON/OFF on the remote

control transmitter make it simple to compare the normal stereo

sound with the fully processed effect sound.

To cancel the effect sound and monitor only the main sound,

press EFFECT or EFCT ON/OFF. Press EFFECT or EFCT

ON/OFF once more to turn effect sounds on.

Front panel Remote control

Notes

• If the effect sound is canceled when signals encoded with

Dolby Digital are input to this unit, signals of all channels are

mixed and are output from the main speakers.

• If EFFECT or EFCT ON/OFF is pressed to turn effect sounds

off when the Dolby Digital is decoded, it may happen that the

sound is output faintly or not output normally depending on

the source. In that case, press EFFECT or EFCT ON/OFF to

turn effect sounds on, or use input signals not encoded with

Dolby Digital.

This unit incorporates a Dolby Digital decoder and a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder for multi-channel sound reproduction of

sources encoded with Dolby Surround. The operation of these decoders can be controlled by selecting a corresponding DSP

program including the combined operation of YAMAHA DSP and Dolby Digital or Dolby Pro Logic Surround.

01RX-V595-e/f4 6/23/99, 4:11 PM40

English

2 Press + or – to adjust the settings for delay time or

speaker output levels.

Front panel Remote control

3 Repeat steps 1 to 3 to adjust settings on any other

item.

ADJUSTING DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS

When using the digital sound field processor including the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder or the Dolby Digital decoder, you can

adjust the delay time between the main sound and effect sound, and each speaker’s output level as you prefer.

Adjusting method

If you are using the remote control transmitter, set the

SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN or DSP position on the

remote control transmitter.

1 Press TIME/LEVEL once or more until the name of item

which you want to adjust appears on the display.

Front panel Remote control

* After pressing TIME/LEVEL once on the remote control

transmitter, you can also select the name of item by

pressing

When pressed, the selection changes as follows:

DELAY

CENTER

R SUR.

L SUR.

SWFR

* Pressing on the remote control transmitter changes the

selection in the reverse order.

* Depending on the mode of this unit, you cannot select all

items.

Delay time

Center speaker output level

Right rear speaker output level

Left rear speaker output level

Subwoofer output level

01RX-V595-e/f4 6/23/99, 4:11 PM41

Adjusting delay time

You can adjust the time difference between the beginning of the

sound from the main speakers and the beginning of the effect

sound from the rear speakers.

The larger the value, the later the effect sound is generated.

This adjustment can be made to all programs individually.

Notes

• Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with

some sources.

• When + or – is pressed, the sound is momentarily inter-

rupted.

Adjusting output level of the center, right rear and left rear speakers, and subwoofer

Program

1. DOLBY PRO LOGIC

DOLBY DIGITAL

2. DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED

DOLBY DIGITAL ENHANCED

3. 70 mm MOVIE THEATER

DIGITAL MOVIE THEATER

4. MONO MOVIE

5. TV SPORTS

6. DISCO

7. ROCK CONCERT

8. CONCERT HALL

If desired, you can adjust the sound output level of each

speaker even if the output level is already set in “SPEAKER

BALANCE ADJUSTMENT” on pages 24 to 26.

Notes

• Output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted when

the program DISCO, ROCK CONCERT or CONCERT HALL

is selected, and the input signal is analog, PCM audio, or

encoded with Dolby Digital in 2-channel.

• If the function “1. CNTR” in the SET MENU mode is set to the

NONE position, the sound output level of the center speaker

cannot be adjusted. This is because, in this mode, the center

sound is automatically output from the left and right main

speakers.

• Once the output level is adjusted, the level will be the same

for all digital sound field programs.

Speakers

CENTER

RIGHT SURROUND (Rear)

LEFT SURROUND (Rear)

SUBWOOFER

Control range (dB)

MIN, –20 to +10

MIN, –20 to 0

Preset value

Control range (ms)

15 to 30

0 to 15

15 to 30

0 to 15

15 to 30

1 to 99

Note

The values of the delay time, center/rear/subwoofer output level you set the last time will remain memorized even when this unit is

in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is kept disconnected for more than one week, these values will automatically

change back to the original factory settings.

01RX-V595-e/f4 6/23/99, 4:11 PM42

English

7. D.RNG (Adjusting dynamic range)

Choices: MAX/STD/MIN

Preset position: MAX

* This adjustment is effective only when the Dolby Digital is

decoded.

MAX: “Dynamic range” is the difference between the

maximum level and the minimum level of sounds.

Sounds on a movie originally designed for movie

theaters feature very wide dynamic range.

Dolby Digital technology can bring the original sound

track into a home audio format with this wide

dynamic range unchanged.

In this position, a source encoded with the Dolby

Digital is reproduced in the original sound track’s

wide dynamic range providing you with powerful

sounds just like in a movie theater.

Selecting this position will be even better if you can

listen to a source in a high output level in a room

specially soundproofed for audio/video enjoyment.

STD (Standard):

Powerful sounds of extremely wide dynamic range

are not always suitable for home use. Depending

upon the condition of your listening environment, it

may not be possible to increase the sound output

level as high as a movie theater. However, in a level

suitable for listening to in your room, the low level

parts of source sound often cannot be heard so well

because they will be lost among noises in your

environment.

Dolby Digital technology also made it possible to

reduce an original sound track’s dynamic range for a

home audio format by “compressing” the data of

sound.

In this position, a source encoded with the Dolby

Digital is reproduced in the “compressed” dynamic

range of the source suitable for low level listening.

MIN: In this position, dynamic range is more reduced than

in the STD position.

Selecting this position will be effective when you

must listen to a source at lower level.

ADJUSTMENTS IN THE “SET MENU” MODE

The following ten types of functions maximize the performance of your system and expand your enjoyment for audio listening and

video watching.

1. CNTR (CENTER SPEAKER)

2. REAR (REAR SPEAKER)

3. MAIN (MAIN SPEAKER)

4. BASS (LFE/BASS OUT)

5. M.LVL (MAIN LEVEL)

For details on “1. CNTR”, “2. REAR”, “3. MAIN”, “4. BASS” and

“5. M.LVL”, see page 22. (Once you have selected the

appropriate modes, you do not have to change settings unless

any alteration is made in your speaker system.)

LFE [Adjusting the output level of the

LFE (low frequency effect) channel]

Control range: –20 dB to 0 dB (in 1 dB step)

Preset value: 0 dB

* This adjustment is effective only when the Dolby Digital is

decoded and the signals of selected source encoded with the

Dolby Digital contain LFE signals.

Adjusts the output level of the LFE (low frequency effect)

channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals of other

channels to output them from the same speakers, the ratio of

LFE signal level to the level of other signals are adjusted.

(See page 7 for details about the LFE channel.)

6. LFE (LFE LEVEL)

7. D.RNG (DYNAMIC RANGE)

8. C.DELAY (CENTER DELAY)

9. GUARD (MEMORY GUARD)

10. INPUT (INPUT MODE)

01RX-V595-e/f5 6/23/99, 4:11 PM43

8. C.DELAY [Adjusting the delay of

center sounds (dialog etc.)]

Control range: 0 ms to 5 ms (in 1 ms step)

Preset value: 0 ms

* This adjustment is effective only when the Dolby Digital is

decoded and the signals of selected source encoded with the

Dolby Digital contain center-channel signals.

Adjusts the delay between the main sounds (at the main

channels) and dialog etc. (at the center channel).

The larger the value, the later the dialog etc. is generated.

This is for making sounds from the left main, center and right

main speakers reach your listening position at the same time.

This is achieved by delaying the sound from the center speaker

if the distance from the center speaker to your listening position

is shorter than the distance from the left or right main speaker

to your listening position.

9. GUARD

Choices: ON/OFF

Preset position: OFF

If you wish to prevent accidental alteration to SET MENU and

other adjustments on this unit, select ON. The following

functions on this unit can be locked by this operation.

• Functions in the SET MENU mode

• Functions in the TIME/LEVEL mode

• Functions when using TEST

10. INPUT (Selecting the initial input

mode of the sources connected to

the TV/DBS input terminals)

For the sources connected to the TV/DBS input terminals of

this unit only, you can designate the input mode that is auto-

matically selected when the power of this unit is switched on.

AUTO: In this position, the AUTO input mode is always

selected when the power of this unit is switched on.

LAST: In this position, the input mode you selected last time

is memorized and will not be changed even if the

power of this unit is switched on.

* See page 29 for details on switching the input mode.

Adjusting method

Operations should be made while watching the information on

this unit’s display.

If you are using the remote control transmitter, set the

SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN or DSP position on the

remote control transmitter.

Press SET MENU once or more so that the title of function

which you want to change appears on the display.

Front panel Remote control

* After pressing SET MENU once on the remote control

transmitter, you can also select the title by pressing

(Pressing

goes back one selection.)

Press + or – to select any desired position or edit parameters

on the function.

Front panel Remote control

Repeat these steps to change and adjust settings on any other

function.

01RX-V595-e/f5 6/23/99, 4:11 PM44

English

You can use this remote control transmitter to control not only this unit but also other components connected to it. This is factory

set to control this unit and most YAMAHA audio components. To control other brands of components, you must preset the remote

control transmitter with the manufacturer’s codes listed from page 108.

2 Press the desired operation button.

Note: Press the button with the remote control transmitter

aimed at the front panel.

REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER

Basic Operations

1 Select the component that you want to control by turning

the SELECTOR DIAL.

Note: Turn the SELECTOR DIAL until it stops with a click.

Components which can be controlled

There are nine positions that you can select to control connected components with this remote control transmitter. When turning the

SELECTOR DIAL, the position changes as follows:

SELECTOR

DIAL

Notes

1. The shaded positions in the diagram above indicate that you can preset the code for the manufacturer of your component.

Note that you can preset only one code for one position. For details, see “SETUP CODES” on page 50.

2. The DVD/LD and DVD MENU positions

• Be sure that the SELECTOR DIAL is set to the DVD/LD position when presetting the code for a DVD or an LD player. The

code that you preset to the DVD/LD position is also preset to the DVD MENU position simultaneously. You cannot preset the

code for a DVD player when the SELECTOR DIAL is set to the DVD MENU position.

• DVD MENU operations cannot be performed for some DVD players.

3. When using a second (and third) VCR (For details, see “To use a second (and third) VCR” on page 50.)

• If you are not using a CBL/DBS (cable TV or DBS tuner), the second (or third) VCR can be preset using the CBL/DBS

position.

• If you are not using a DVD player, the second (or third) VCR can be preset using the DVD MENU position. Note that in this

case you must preset a code for an LD player to the DVD/LD position even if an LD player is not used.

DVD/LD & DVD MENU:

An LD player can be controlled using the DVD/LD position.

A DVD player can be controlled using the DVD/LD and DVD

MENU position. When using the YAMAHA DVD player

(DVD-1000 or DVD-S700), be sure to preset the code number

“4490”.

AMP/TUN:

You can perform basic opera-

tions of this unit with the

SELECTOR DIAL set to this

position.

TAPE/MD:

The code for a YAMAHA tape deck is preset.

(Be sure to preset the proper code when operating a YAMAHA

MD recorder.)

CD:

The code for a YAMAHA CD player is preset.

DSP:

This unit can be controlled and DSP programs can be selected

directly.

VCR:

A VCR can be controlled.

CBL/DBS:

A cable television or

DBS tuner can be

controlled.

TV:

A television can be

controlled.

Indicator

The indicator will flash when the button

is pressed.

The component name is

displayed in this window.

01RX-V595-e/f6 6/23/99, 4:11 PM45

■ AMP/TUN Note: TV POWER and TV VOLUME function if you have preset the code for your TV.

1 POWER

This button turns this unit on.

2 INPUT

Press these buttons to select the program source.

3 EXT. DEC.

Press this button when using a external decoder.

4 A/B/C/D/E

Press this button to select a group of preset stations.

5 DSP selector

Press this button. While the indicator lights up for about three

seconds, select a DSP program using the number buttons (1 to

8). No DSP program can be selected after the indicator goes off.

6 PRESET (+/–)

Press these buttons to select the preset station number.

7 VOLUME ( )

Press these buttons to adjust the volume level.

8 MUTE

Press this button to mute the sound. To cancel mute, press this

button once more, or press the operation buttons of this unit.

9 SLEEP

Press this button to set the SLEEP timer.

q (LEFT)

This button is used to adjust the settings of the SET MENU

mode and the TIME/LEVEL mode.

r TIME/LEVEL

Press this button to select the item in the TIME/LEVEL mode.

t STANDBY

Press this button to turn this unit into Standby mode.

y TEST

Press this button to output a test tone for adjusting the output

level of the speakers.

u EFCT (EFFECT) ON/OFF

Press this button to switch the DSP program on or off.

p (BACK)

Press this button to go back one selection in the SET MENU

mode and TIME/LEVEL mode.

a (RIGHT)

This button is used to adjust the settings of the SET MENU

mode and the TIME/LEVEL mode.

s (NEXT)

Press this button to advance one selection in the SET MENU

mode and TIME/LEVEL mode.

f SET MENU

Press this button to select functions in the SET MENU mode.

2 DSP program

Press these buttons to select the DSP program (1 to 8). When

you select the input source, set the SELECTOR DIAL to the

AMP/TUN position.

Note: The function of all buttons other than DSP program is

the same as with the AMP/TUN position.

■ DSP

Indicator:

Flashes in red

when the button

is pressed.

Indicator window:

Displays the names of

components which

can be controlled.

SELECTOR DIAL:

Selects the

component to be

controlled.

Faintly colored buttons do not function.

(TV VOLUME)

(TV POWER)

01RX-V595-e/f6 6/23/99, 4:11 PM46

English

Faintly colored buttons do not function. For the buttons which are not described here, see “AMP/TUN” on page 46.

For details, please refer to the owner’s manual for each component.

■CD

■TAPE/MD

Note: TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have preset the code

for your TV.

1 POWER

This button turns this unit on under the default settings. (The code for a YAMAHA CD

player is preset as the default code.) If other codes are preset, only those preset CD

players having a remote controller with a POWER button will be turned on.

6 DISC SKIP (+/–)

Press this button to skip to the next or previous CD.

q , (SKIP)

Press

to skip to the next track. Press to skip to the previous track.

w (PLAY)

Press this button to play a CD.

e (BACKWARD)

Press this button to backward the track that is playing.

p (PAUSE)

Press this button to pause operation. This button functions as PAUSE/STOP for

operating YAMAHA CD players under default settings.

s (STOP)

Press this button to stop operation. This button functions as PAUSE/STOP for

operating YAMAHA CD players under default settings.

d (FAST FORWARD)

Press this button to fast forward the track that is playing.



Notes: • TV POWER and TV VOLUME function if you have preset the code for your TV.

• Be sure to preset the proper code for your MD recorder.

TAPE

1 POWER

This button turns this unit on under the default settings. (The

code for a YAMAHA tape deck is preset as the default code.)

If other codes are preset, only those preset tape decks having

a remote controller with a POWER button will be turned on.

0 (REC/PAUSE)

Press this button to pause recording on a tape deck.

q DIR A

Press this button to select the playing direction of deck A.

w (PLAY)

Press this button to play a tape.

e (REWIND)

Press this button to rewind a tape.

o DECK A/B

Press this button to select double cassette tape deck A or B.

a DIR B

Press this button to select the playing direction of deck B.

s (STOP)

Press this button to stop operation of a tape.

d (FAST FORWARD)

Press this button to fast forward a tape.

1 POWER

This button turns this unit on if

you have preset the code for

the YAMAHA MD recorder. If

other codes are preset, only

those preset MD recorders

having a remote controller with

a POWER button will be turned

on.

0 (REC/PAUSE)

q (SKIP)

w (PLAY)

e (BACKWARD)

i DISPLAY

p (PAUSE)

a (SKIP)

s (STOP)

d (FAST FORWARD)

(TV

VOLUME)

(TV

POWER)

(TV

VOLUME)

(TV

POWER)

(TV INPUT)

DISPLAY

01RX-V595-e/f6 6/23/99, 4:12 PM47

■DVD MENU

Faintly colored buttons do not function. For the buttons which are not described here, see “AMP/TUN” on page 46.

For details, please refer to the owner’s manual for each component.

POWER

(DVD) This button turns this unit on under the default

settings. (The code for a YAMAHA DVD player is preset

as the default code.) If other codes are preset, only

those preset DVD players having a remote controller

with a POWER button will be turned on.

(LD) This button turns this unit on if you have preset the

code for the YAMAHA LD player. If other codes are

preset, only those preset LD players having a remote

controller with a POWER button will be turned on.

DISC SKIP

SKIP/SEARCH

PLAY

SUBTITLE (DVD)/BACKWARD (LD)

SUBTITLE ON/OFF (DVD)

DISPLAY

PAUSE

STOP

ANGLE (DVD)/FAST FORWARD (LD)

AUDIO (DVD)

POWER

(DVD) This button turns this unit on under the default

settings. (The code for a YAMAHA DVD player is preset

as the default code.) If other codes are preset, only

those preset DVD players having a remote controller

with a POWER button will be turned on.

Numeric buttons

+10

DISC SKIP

MENU LEFT

MENU SELECT

SET UP

TITLE

CLEAR

TITLE/INDEX

MENU UP

MENU RIGHT

MENU DOWN

RETURN

Note: TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT

function if you have preset the code for your TV.

■DVD/LD

Note: TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT

function if you have preset the code for your TV.

(TV POWER)

(TV VOLUME)

(TV INPUT)

(TV POWER)

(TV VOLUME)

(TV INPUT)

01RX-V595-e/f6 6/23/99, 4:12 PM48

English

■CBL/DBS

Note: TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV

INPUT function if you have preset

the code for your TV.

■VCR

Note: TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you

have preset the code for your TV.

POWER

DISPLAY

CHANNEL

CHANNEL ENTER

VCR REC

Press this button twice

to start recording.

CHANNEL UP DOWN

PLAY

REWIND

PAUSE

STOP

FAST FORWARD

POWER

DISPLAY

CHANNEL

CHANNEL ENTER

MENU LEFT

CHANNEL UP DOWN

MENU SELECT

MENU UP

MENU RIGHT

MENU DOWN

+100

RECALL

■TV

Note: You can control your VCR if you have preset the code for

it.

DISPLAY

CHANNEL

CHANNEL ENTER

TV MUTE

CHANNEL UP DOWN

TV SLEEP

TV POWER

TV INPUT

TV EFFECT ON/OFF

TV VOLUME

Faintly colored buttons do not function. For the buttons which are not described here, see “AMP/TUN” on page 46.

For details, please refer to the owner’s manual for each component.

(TV VOLUME)

(TV INPUT)

(TV POWER)

(TV VOLUME)

(TV INPUT)

(VCR REC

Press this button twice.)

(VCR REWIND)

(VCR PLAY)

(VCR PAUSE)

(VCR STOP)

(VCR FAST

FORWARD)

(TV POWER)

01RX-V595-e/f6 6/23/99, 4:12 PM49

SETUP CODES

To use a second (and third) VCR

You can use the CBL/DBS and/or DVD

MENU positions to control a second

VCR (and/or third) if a CBL (or DBS) or

DVD player is not used.

If you are using the DVD MENU position

for a second (or third) VCR, you must

preset a code for an LD player to the

DVD/LD position.

1. Turn on the VCR to be used.

2. Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the

CBL/DBS or DVD MENU position.

3. Press both VOLUME buttons (

) at the same time until the

indicator flashes twice.

4. Press MUTE.

5. Use the numeric buttons to enter the

four-digit code for a second (or third)

VCR. Make sure that the indicator

flashes twice. If the indicator does

not flash, repeat step 3 and 4, and

re-enter the code.

To control your components

(MD recorder, DVD player,

TV etc.)

1. Turn on the component to be used.

2. Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the

desired component (TAPE/MD,

DVD/LD, TV etc.).

3. Press both VOLUME buttons (

) at the same time until the

indicator flashes twice.

4. Use the numeric buttons to enter the

four-digit manufacturer’s code for

the component to be used. Make

sure that the indicator flashes twice.

If the indicator does not flash, repeat

step 3 and re-enter the code.

5. Press POWER (or any other button)

on the remote control transmitter to

check if you have preset the code

correctly. If the component cannot

be controlled using the remote

control transmitter, try entering

another code for the same manufac-

turer.

6. Press POWER (or any other button)

on the remote control transmitter to

check if you have preset the code

correctly. If the VCR cannot be

controlled using the remote control

transmitter, try entering another

code for the same manufacturer.

Returning to the default code

To return all components to the default

code, follow these steps.

1. Press both VOLUME buttons (

) at the same time until the

indicator flashes twice.

2. Enter the code number “9987”.

3. Make sure that the indicator flashes

twice.

To return each component to the default

code, follow these steps.

1. Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the

component to be return to the

default code.

2. Press both VOLUME buttons (

) at the same time until the

indicator flashes twice.

3. Enter the code number “9999”.

4. Make sure that the indicator flashes

twice.

The following codes are preset as the

default code.

Default codes

POSITION Component Code

Code

TV TV 0047 0037

CBL/DBS DBS tuner 2566 2455

VCR VCR 3060 3072

DVD/LD DVD player

4545 YAMAHA

CD CD player

6187 YAMAHA

TAPE/MD Tape deck

8524 YAMAHA

*1: Canada and China models

*2: Australia model

We recommend that you write all code

numbers you have preset on the “Quick

Reference Card”.

Presetting the remote control transmitter

Perform the presetting procedure for each component you want to control with this remote control transmitter.

Note: If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for the manufacturer, use the original remote control that

came with the component.

01RX-V595-e/f6 6/23/99, 4:12 PM50

English

NOTES ABOUT THE REMOTE

CONTROL TRANSMITTER

Battery installation

Battery replacement

If the remote control transmitter operates only when it is closed

to this unit, the batteries are weak. Replace both batteries with

new ones.

Be sure to replace batteries within about two minutes. If it

takes longer than two minutes, the codes preset for the

remote control transmitter will return to the default codes.

Notes

• Use only AA, R6, UM-3 batteries for replacement.

• Be sure the polarities are correct. (See the illustration inside

the battery compartment.)

• Remove the batteries if the remote control transmitter will not

be used for an extended period of time.

• If batteries leak, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touch-

ing the leaked material or letting it come in contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly

before installing new batteries.

Remote control transmitter operation range

Notes

• There should be no large obstacles between the remote

control transmitter and this unit.

• If the remote control sensor is directly illuminated by strong

lighting (especially an inverter type of fluorescent lamp etc.),

it might cause the remote control transmitter not to work

correctly. In this case, reposition this unit to avoid direct

lighting.

Remote control

sensor

Within approximately

6 m (20 feet)

01RX-V595-e/f6 6/23/99, 4:12 PM51

SYMPTOM

The unit fails to turn on when

STANDBY/ON is pressed, or turns

into the standby mode suddenly

soon after the power is turned on.

The unit does not work normally.

No sound or no picture.

The sound suddenly goes off.

Only one side speaker outputs

sound.

A “humming” sound can be heard.

The volume level is low while playing

a record.

The volume level cannot be

increased, or the sound is distorted.

No sound from the rear speakers.

No sound from the center speaker.

CAUSE

Power cord is not plugged in or is not

completely inserted.

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

on the rear panel is not fully set to the

upper or lower end.

There is an influence of strong external

noise (lightning, excessive static

electricity, etc.) or a misoperation while

using this unit.

Incorrect output cord connections.

Appropriate input source is not

selected.

SPEAKERS are not set properly.

Speaker connections are not secure.

The protection circuit has been

activated because of short circuit etc.

The SLEEP timer has functioned.

Incorrect setting of BALANCE.

Incorrect cord connections.

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

The record is being played on a

turntable with an MC cartridge.

The component connected to the REC

OUT terminals of this unit is in the

standby mode.

The sound output level of the rear

speakers is set to minimum.

A monaural sound source is being

played in DOLBY PRO LOGIC or

DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED

mode.

The sound output level of the center

speaker is set to minimum.

The center channel mode is in NONE

mode.

Incorrect sound field program selection.

REMEDY

Firmly plug in the power cord.

Set the switch fully to the upper or

lower end.

Turn this unit into the standby mode

and disconnect the AC power cord from

the AC outlet. After about 30 seconds

have passed, connect the power and

operate this unit again.

Connect the cords properly. If the

problem persists, the cords may be

defective.

Select an appropriate input source with

INPUT.

Set SPEAKERS corresponding to the

speakers in use to the ON position.

Secure the connections.

Turning the unit into the standby mode

and then on again will reset the

protection circuit.

Cancel the SLEEP timer function.

Adjust it to the appropriate position.

Connect the cords properly. If the

problem persists, the cords may be

defective.

Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the

problem persists, the cords may be

defective.

Make the GND connection between the

turntable and this unit.

The turntable should be connected to

the unit through the MC head amplifier.

Turn the power to the component on.

Raise the sound output level of the rear

speakers.

Select another sound field program

suitable for the monaural sound source.

Raise the sound output level of the

center speaker.

Select LARGE or SMALL.

Select the appropriate program.

Amplifier

TROUBLESHOOTING

If the unit fails to operate normally, check the following points to determine whether the fault can be corrected by the simple

measures suggested. If it cannot be corrected, or if the fault is not listed in the SYMPTOM column, disconnect the power cord and

contact your authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for help.

01RX-V595-e/f7 6/23/99, 4:12 PM52

English

SYMPTOM

FM stereo reception is noisy.

There is distortion and clear

reception cannot be obtained even

with a good FM antenna.

The desired station cannot be tuned

in with the automatic tuning method.

Previously preset stations can no

longer be tuned in.

The desired station cannot be tuned

in with the automatic tuning method.

There are continuous crackling and

hissing noises.

There are buzzing and whining

noises (especially in the evening).

The remote control transmitter does

not work.

The sound is degraded when

listening with headphones to a

CD player or tape deck that is

connected to this unit.

CAUSE

Because of the characteristics of FM

stereo broadcasts, this is limited to

cases where the transmitter is too far

away or the antenna input is poor.

There is multipath interference.

The station is too weak.

This unit has been unplugged for a long

period.

Weak signal or loose antenna

connections.

Noises will result from ligtning,

fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats

and other electrical equipment.

A television set is being used nearby.

Direct sunlight or lighting (of an inverter

type of fluorescent lamp etc.) is striking

the remote control sensor of the main

unit.

The manufacturer’s code is not set

properly.

The proper manufacturer’s code for the

component to be controlled is not set.

The component to be controlled is not

selected.

This unit is in the standby mode.

REMEDY

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high quality directional FM

antenna.

Set TUNING MODE to the manual

tuning mode.

Adjust antenna placement to eliminate

multipath interference.

Use the manual tuning method.

Use a high quality directional FM

antenna.

Repeat the presetting procedure.

Tighten the AM loop antenna

connections and rotate it for best

reception.

Use the manual tuning method.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground

wire. This will help somewhat but it is

difficult to eliminate all noise.

Relocate this unit away from the TV.

Change the position of the main unit.

Set the code again.

Try entering another code for the same

manufacturer.

Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the proper

position.

Turn the power of the unit on.

Remote control transmitter

AM FM

Others

01RX-V595-e/f7 6/23/99, 4:12 PM53

AUDIO SECTION

Minimum RMS Output Power

8 ohms, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

MAIN L/R ........................... 70 W + 70 W

CENTER......................................... 70 W

REAR L/R .......................... 70 W + 70 W

[Australia, China, Singapore and General

models]

MAIN L/R ........................... 65 W + 65 W

CENTER......................................... 65 W

REAR L/R .......................... 65 W + 65 W

8 ohms, 1 kHz, 0.07% THD

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

MAIN L/R ........................... 85 W + 85 W

CENTER......................................... 85 W

REAR L/R .......................... 85 W + 85 W

[Australia, China, Singapore and General

models]

MAIN L/R ........................... 80 W + 80 W

CENTER......................................... 80 W

REAR L/R .......................... 80 W + 80 W

Maximum Power

[China and General models only]

8 ohms, 1 kHz, 10% THD

MAIN L/R ......................... 105 W + 105 W

CENTER ......................................... 105 W

REAR L/R ........................ 105 W + 105 W

Dynamic Power per Channel

(by IHF Dynamic Headroom measuring method)

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

8/6/4/2 ohms .............. 100/120/145/170 W

[Australia, China, Singapore and General

models]

8/6/4/2 ohms ................ 90/110/135/160 W

Dynamic Headroom (8 ohms)

[U.S.A. and Canada models only] ...... 1.55 dB

Power Band Width

8 ohms, 35 W, 0.1% THD ...10 Hz to 50 kHz

Damping Factor (SPEAKERS A)

8 ohms, 20 Hz to 20 kHz ............ 60 or more

Input Sensitivity/Impedance

PHONO MM ................... 2.5 mV/47 k-ohms

CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/

VIDEO AUX ................... 150 mV/47 k-ohms

EXT. DECODER

MAIN L/R .................... 150 mV/47 k-ohms

CENTER/SURROUND L/R/SUBWOOFER

.................................... 150 mV/40 k-ohms

Maximum Input Signal

PHONO MM

1 kHz, 0.1% THD .............100 mV or more

CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/

VIDEO AUX (EFFECT ON)

1 kHz, 0.5% THD ..................2.2V or more

Output Level/Impedance

REC OUT ..................... 150 mV/1.2 k-ohms

SUBWOOFER

(MAIN SP: SMALL) ........ 4.0 V/1.2 k-ohms

Headphones Jack Rated Output/Impedance

CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/

VIDEO AUX input,

1 kHz, 150mV, 8 ohms ....... 0.5 V/390 ohms

Frequency Response (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/

VIDEO AUX to MAIN L/R SP OUT

.................................................... 0±0.5 dB

RIAA Equalization Deviation

PHONO MM .................................. 0±0.5 dB

Total Harmonic Distortion (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

PHONO MM to REC OUT

1 V........................................0.02% or less

Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO MM to REC OUT

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General

models]

(5 mV, Input Shorted) ..........86 dB or more

[Australia and Singapore models]

(5mV, Input Shorted) ...........81 dB or more

CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/

VIDEO AUX to SP OUT (EFFECT OFF)

(150 mV, Input Shorted) ......96 dB or more

Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

MAIN L/R SP OUT................ 150 µV or less

Channel Separation

(Vol. –30 dB, EFFECT OFF)

PHONO MM

(Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)

....................60 dB or more/55 dB or more

CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/

VIDEO AUX

(Input 5.1 k-ohms Terminated, 1 kHz/10 kHz)

....................60 dB or more/45 dB or more

Tone Control Characteristics

BASS: Boost/cut ............. ±10 dB (50 Hz)

Turnover Frequency......... 350 Hz

TREBLE: Boost/cut ........... ±10 dB (20 kHz)

Turnover Frequency........ 3.5 kHz

Filter Characteristics

MAIN L/R, REAR L/R (SPEAKER: SMALL)

(H.P.F.) .................... fc = 90 Hz, 12 dB/oct.

SUBWOOFER

(L.P.F.) ..................... fc = 90 Hz, 18 dB/oct.

VIDEO SECTION

Video Signal Type

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............NTSC

[Australia and Singapore models] ......... PAL

[China and General models]....... NTSC/PAL

Video Signal Level ................ 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

Maximum Input Level .......... 1.5 Vp-p or more

Signal-to-Noise Ratio ...............50 dB or more

Monitor Out Frequency Response

.............................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

..................................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Australia and Singapore models]

..................................... 87.5 to 108.0 MHz

[China and General models]

100 kHz step ................ 87.5 to 108.0 MHz

50 kHz step .............. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)

(100% mod., 1 kHz)

Mono................................. 1.6 µV (15.3 dBf)

Stereo ................................ 23 µV (38.5 dBf)

SPECIFICATIONS

01RX-V595-e/f7 6/23/99, 4:12 PM54

English

Usable Sensitivity (DIN)

[Australia and Singapore models]

Mono (S/N 26 dB) ........................... 0.9 µV

Stereo (S/N 46 dB)........................... 28 µV

Alternate Channel Selectivity (±400 kHz )

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models

only] .................................................... 75 dB

Selectivity (two signals, 40 kHz Dev. ±300 kHz)

[Australia and Singapore models only]

......................................................... 55 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio

(IHF) Mono/Stereo

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General

models] ..................................81 dB/75 dB

(DIN-Weighted, 40 kHz Dev.) Mono/Stereo

[Australia and Singapore models]

...............................................75 dB/69 dB

Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo .................................. 0.1/0.2%

Stereo Separation (1 kHz) .................... 48 dB

Frequency Response

20 Hz to 15 kHz ................................ 0±1 dB

Antenna Input.............. 75 ohms, Unbalanced

Output Level

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General

models]

(100% mod., 1 kHz) ...................... 550 mV

[Australia and Singapore models]

(40 kHz Dev., 1 kHz) ..................... 550 mV

AM SECTION

Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

....................................... 530 to 1,710 kHz

[Australia and Singapore models]

....................................... 531 to 1,611 kHz

[China and General models]

10 kHz step .................... 530 to 1,710 kHz

9 kHz step ...................... 531 to 1,611 kHz

Usable Sensitivity............................ 300 µV/m

Signal-to-Noise Ratio ............................ 52 dB

Antenna.................................... Loop antenna

Output Level

(30% mod., 1 kHz) ........................ 150 mV

GENERAL

Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

........................................ AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model]................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[General model]

.............. AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz

[China model] .................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Singapore model] ............. AC 230 V, 50 Hz

Power Consumption

[U.S.A. model] ................................... 280 W

[Canada model] .................... 310 W/410 VA

[Australia and Singapore models] ..... 300 W

[China and General models].............. 310 W

Maximum Power Consumption

5 ch, 10% THD

[General model only] ......................... 650 W

AC Outlets

2 SWITCHED OUTLETS

[U.S.A., Canada, Singapore, China and

General models]............. 100 W max. total

1 SWITCHED OUTLET

[Australia model] ............ 100 W max. total

Dimensions (W x H x D)

..................................435 x 151 x 391 mm

(17-1/8” x 5-15/16” x 15-3/8”)

Weight .......................... 12.5 kg (27 lbs. 8 oz.)

Accessories......................... AM loop antenna

Indoor FM antenna

Remote control transmitter

Batteries

Antenna adapter

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Specifications are subject to change without

notice.

01RX-V595-e/f7 6/23/99, 4:12 PM55

01RX-V595-e/f7 6/23/99, 4:12 PM56

108

Manufacturer Code

A-Mark 0003

AOC 0030, 0019, 0003, 0052, 0185

Abex 0032

Acura 0009

Admiral 0093

Adventura 0046

Adyson 0032

Aiko 0092

Akai 0030, 0208

Akura 0264

Alaron 0179, 0216

Alba 0009, 0037

Ambassador 0177

Amstrad 0009, 0171, 0177

Anam 0180, 0004, 0009, 0068

Anam National 0161

Anitech 0009, 0068

Arcam 0216

Archer 0003

Audinac 0391

Audiosonic 0037, 0109

Audiovox 0451, 0180, 0003, 0092

BPL 0282

Basic Line 0009

Baur 0037, 0512, 0535, 0554

Baysonic 0180

Belcor 0019

Bell & Howell 0154, 0016

Beon 0037

Blaupunkt 0535, 0554

Blue Star 0282

Bradford 0180

Brandt 0109

Britannia 0216

Brockwood 0019

Broksonic 0236, 0463, 0003, 0426

Bush 0282, 0009, 0037

CCE 0037

CS Electronics 0216

CXC 0180

Candle 0030, 0056, 0046, 0186

Carnivale 0030

Carver 0054, 0170

Cascade 0009

Cathay 0037

Celebrity 0000

Centurion 0037

Cimline 0009

Cineral 0451, 0092

Citizen 0060, 0030, 0056, 0039,

0046, 0092, 0186, 0280

Clairtone 0185

Clarivox 0037

Concerto 0056

Contec 0180, 0009, 0185, 0216

Craig 0180, 0161

Crosley 0054

Crown 0180, 0039, 0009, 0037, 0418

Curtis Mathes 0047, 0054, 0154, 0051,

0451, 0093, 0060, 0030,

0145, 0056, 0016, 0039, 0166

Daewoo 0451, 0019, 0039, 0009,

0037, 0066, 0092

Dansai 0037

Dayton 0009

Daytron 0019

De Graaf 0208

Decca 0037

Denon 0145

Dixi 0004, 0009, 0037

Dumont 0017, 0019

Ectec 0391

Electroband 0000, 0185

Elin 0037

Elta 0009

Emerson 0154, 0236, 0463, 0180,

0282, 0178, 0019, 0179,

0039, 0177, 0185, 0280

Envision 0030

Erres 0037

Ferguson 0037, 0109, 0287, 0560

Fidelity 0216

Finlandia 0208

Finlux 0179, 0037

Firstline 0009, 0216

Fisher 0154, 0159, 0208

Formenti 0037

Frontech 0264

Fujitsu 0179

Funai 0180, 0179, 0171, 0264

Futuretech 0180

GE 0047, 0051, 0451, 0093,

0282, 0178, 0021, 0135

GEC 0037

Geloso 0009

Gibralter 0017, 0030, 0019

GoldStar 0030, 0178, 0019, 0056,

0001, 0002, 0032, 0037, 0109

Goodmans 0179, 0037

Gradiente 0053, 0056, 0170

Granada 0037, 0208, 0339, 0502

Grandin 0282

Grundig 0037, 0535, 0554

Grunpy 0180, 0179

HCM 0282, 0009

Hallmark 0178

Hanseatic 0037

Harley Davidson 0179

Harvard 0180, 0068

Hinari 0179, 0009, 0037, 0283

Hisawa 0282

Hitachi 0145, 0056, 0032,

0109, 0151, 0576

Huanyu 0216

Hypson 0282, 0037, 0264

ICE 0264

ITT 0283

Imperial 0418

Indiana 0037

Infinity 0054

Inteq 0017

Interbuy 0068

Interfunk 0037, 0512

Intervision 0037, 0068, 0264

JBL 0054

JCB 0000

JEC 0502

JVC 0053, 0069, 0160

Janeil 0046

KEC 0180

KTV 0180, 0030, 0039, 0185, 0280

Kaisui 0282, 0009, 0216

Kamp 0216

Kawasho 0216

Kaypani 0052

Kendo 0037

Kenwood 0030, 0019

Kingsley 0216

Kloss 0046

Korpel 0037

Koyoda 0009

LG 0056

LXI 0047, 0054, 0154, 0156, 0178

Leyco 0037, 0264

Liesenk & Tter 0037

Lloytron 0032

Loewe 0512

Logik 0016, 0001

Luxman 0056

M Electronic 0009, 0037, 0068,

0109, 0287

MEI 0185

MGA 0150, 0030, 0178, 0019

MTC 0060, 0030, 0019, 0056,

0185, 0216, 0512

Magnavox 0054, 0030, 0179,

0186, 0187

Majestic 0016

Manesth 0264

Marantz 0054, 0030, 0037

Mark 0037

Matsui 0009, 0035, 0037, 0177, 0208

Matsushita 0250

Mediator 0037

Megatron 0178, 0145, 0003

Memorex 0154, 0250, 0150, 0178,

0056, 0016, 0009

LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES (Canada and China models)

LISTE DES CODES FABRICANTS (Modèles pour le Canada et la Chine)

01RX-V595-e/fCODE(US) 6/23/99, 4:14 PM108

109

Rex 0264

Rhapsody 0185, 0216

Roadstar 0009, 0264, 0418

Runco 0017, 0030

SBR 0037

SEG 0264

SEI 0177

SSS 0180, 0019

Saba 0109, 0287

Saisho 0009, 0177, 0264

Sampo 0030, 0039, 0032, 0052

Samsung 0060, 0030, 0178, 0019,

0056, 0039, 0009, 0032,

0037, 0090, 0264, 0427

Samsux 0039

Sandra 0216

Sansei 0451

Sansui 0463

Sanyo 0154, 0159, 0208, 0339

Schneider 0037

Scimitsu 0019

Scotch 0178

Scott 0236, 0180, 0178, 0019, 0179

Sears 0047, 0054, 0154, 0156, 0178,

0179, 0056, 0149, 0159, 0171

Semivox 0180

Semp 0156

Sentra 0035, 0283

Sharp 0093, 0165, 0039

Shogun 0019

Siemens 0037, 0535, 0554

Signature 0016

Simpson 0186, 0187

Sinudyne 0177

Solavox 0032

Sonitron 0208

Sonoko 0009, 0037

Sonolor 0208

Sontec 0037

Sony 0000, 0080

Soundesign 0180, 0178, 0179, 0186

Soundwave 0037, 0418

Spectricon 0003

Squareview 0171

Standard 0009

Starlite 0180

Supra 0056

Supre-Macy 0046

Supreme 0000

Sylvania 0054, 0030

Symphonic 0171

Sysline 0037

TMK 0178, 0056, 0177

Tandy 0093

Tatung 0003, 0037

Technics 0051, 0250

Technol Ace 0179

Techwood 0051, 0056, 0003

Teknika 0054, 0180, 0150, 0060,

0019, 0179, 0056, 0016,

0039, 0092, 0186

Telefunken 0056, 0109, 0252

Metz 0535

Midland 0047, 0017, 0051,

0039, 0032, 0135

Minerva 0535, 0554

Minutz 0021

Mitsubishi 0093, 0150, 0178,

0019, 0512, 0535

Mivar 0216

Motorola 0093

Multitech 0180, 0009, 0216

NAD 0156, 0178, 0166

NEC 0030, 0019, 0056, 0170

NEI 0037

NTC 0092

Neckermann 0037, 0554

Nesco 0179

Nikkai 0032, 0035, 0037, 0216, 0264

Nikko 0030, 0178, 0092

Nisato 0391

Nordmende 0109, 0287, 0560

Noshi 0018

Onwa 0180

Optimus 0154, 0250, 0166

Optonica 0093, 0165

Orion 0236, 0463, 0179, 0037, 0177

Osaki 0032, 0264

Osume 0032

Otto Versand 0037, 0512, 0535, 0554

Palladium 0418

Panama 0264

Panasonic 0051, 0250, 0226

Pathe Cinema 0216

Pausa 0009

Penney 0047, 0156, 0051, 0060, 0030,

0178, 0021, 0019, 0018, 0056,

0039, 0002, 0003,

0032, 0135, 0149

Phase 0032

Philco 0054, 0463, 0030, 0145, 0019

Philips 0054, 0037, 0554

Phonola 0037

Pilot 0030, 0019, 0039

Pioneer 0109, 0166, 0287

Portland 0019, 0039, 0092

Prism 0051

Profex 0009

Proscan 0047

Protech 0009, 0037, 0264, 0418

Proton 0178, 0003, 0052

Pulsar 0017, 0019

Quasar 0051, 0250, 0165

Quelle 0037, 0252, 0512, 0535, 0554

R-Line 0037

RCA 0047, 0051, 0093, 0019,

0018, 0090, 0135

Radio Shack 0047, 0154, 0165, 0180,

0030, 0178, 0019, 0056,

0039, 0032

Radiola 0037

Realistic 0154, 0165, 0180, 0030,

0178, 0019, 0056, 0039, 0032

Revox 0037

Teletech 0009

Teleton 0186

Texet 0216

Thomson 0109, 0287

Thorn 0035, 0037, 0512, 0535

Tomashi 0282

Toshiba 0154, 0156, 0060,

0035, 0149, 0502

Tosonic 0185

Totevision 0039

Triumph 0177

Ultra 0391

Universum 0037, 0264, 0535

Vector Research 0030

Vestel 0037

Victor 0053

Vidikron 0054

Vidtech 0178, 0019

Viking 0046

Wards 0054, 0165, 0030, 0178, 0021,

0019, 0179, 0056, 0016, 0080

Watson 0037

White Westinghouse 0037, 0216

Yamaha 0030, 0019

Yoko 0037, 0264

Zenith 0017, 0016, 0092

Zonda 0003

CABLE

Manufacturer Code

ABC 1003, 1008, 1014, 1011

Allegro 1315

Archer 1797

BBT 1267

Belcor 1056

British Telecom 1003

Cable Star 1056

Citizen 1315

Colour Voice 1031

Comtronics 1040

Contec 1019

Emerson 1797

Everquest 1015, 1040

Focus 1400

GC Electronics 1056

Gemini 1015

General Instrument 1476, 1011

GoldStar 1144, 1040

Goodmind 1797

Hamlin 1020, 1259, 1009, 1034

Hitachi 1011

Jasco 1315

Jerrold 1003, 1012, 1476, 1014,

1015, 1011, 1024

MNet 1019

Magnavox 1027

Memorex 1000

Movie Time 1063

01RX-V595-e/fCODE(US) 6/23/99, 4:14 PM109

110

NSC 1063

Novaplex 1618

Oak 1019

Optimus 1021

PVP Stereo Visual Matrix 1003

Panasonic 1000, 1107, 1021

Paragon 1000

Philips 1027, 1031

Pioneer 1144, 1533

Popular Mechanics 1400

Prelude 1770

Pulsar 1000

RCA 1021

Radio Shack 1015, 1315

Recoton 1400

Regal 1020, 1259

Rembrandt 1011

Runco 1000

SL Marx 1040

Samsung 1144, 1040

Scientific Atlanta 1008, 1477

Signal 1015, 1040

Signature 1011

Sprucer 1021

StarSight 1422

Starcom 1003, 1015

Stargate 1015, 1040, 1770, 1797

Starquest 1015

TV86 1063

TeleCaption 1221

Teleview 1040

Timeless 1418

Tocom 1012

Toshiba 1000

Tusa 1015

United Cable 1003

Universal 1056, 1191

Viewstar 1063, 1027

Zenith 1000, 1054, 1525

Zentek 1400

DBS TUNER

Manufacturer Code

AST 2321

Audio Ton 2364

Avalon 2396

Chaparral 2053, 2209

Connexions 2396

DNT 2396

Echostar 2396

Elta 2364

Expressvu 2775

Fuba 2396

Galaxis 2364

Galaxisat 2321

General Instrument 2361

Huth 2364

JSR 2364

JVC 2775

Jerrold 2361

Lemon 2692

NEC 2507

Neusat 2692

Next-Wave 2732

Primestar 2361

Radix 2396

SAT 2321

SatPartner 2692

Seemann 2396

Triad 2321

Wisi 2321, 2396

Zehnder 2321

(DSS)

AlphaStar 2772

Echostar 2775

General Instrument 2869

HTS 2775

Hitachi 2819

Hughes Network System 2749

Jerrold 2627

Magnavox 2724

Memorex 2724

Panasonic 2701

Philips 2724

Primestar 2627

RCA 2566

Sony 2639

Star Choice 2869

Toshiba 2790

Uniden 2724

VCR

Manufacturer Code

ASA 3037, 3081

Admiral 3048

Adventura 3000

Aiko 3278

Aiwa 3037, 3000

Akai 3041, 3061, 3281, 3288

Akiba 3072

Akura 3271

Alba 3209, 3072, 3278, 3020, 3295

Ambassador 3020

American High 3035

Amstrad 3000, 3278

Anitech 3072

Asha 3240

Asuka 3037

Audiovox 3037

Baird 3000, 3104, 3041

Basic Line 3072, 3278, 3020

Beaumark 3240

Bell & Howell 3104

Blaupunkt 3162, 3034, 3195,

3226, 3227

Brandt 3187, 3320

Brandt Electronic 3041

Broksonic 3184, 3121, 3209, 3002,

3295, 3361, 3479

Bush 3209, 3072, 3278

CCE 3072, 3278

CGE 3000

Calix 3037

Canon 3035

Capehart 3020

Carver 3081

Catron 3020

Cimline 3072

Cineral 3278

Citizen 3037, 3278

Clatronic 3020

Colt 3072

Condor 3020

Craig 3037, 3047, 3240, 3072, 3271

Crown 3072, 3278, 3020

Curtis Mathes 3060, 3035, 3041, 3162

Cybernex 3240

Cyrus 3081

Daewoo 3045, 3278, 3020

Dansai 3072

Daytron 3020

De Graaf 3042, 3166

Decca 3081, 3000

Denon 3042

Dual 3041

Dumont 3081, 3000, 3104

Dynatech 3000

ESC 3240, 3278

Elbe 3038

Elcatech 3072

Electrohome 3037

Electrophonic 3037

Emerex 3032

Emerson 3037, 3184, 3000, 3121,

3043, 3209, 3002, 3278,

3036, 3061, 3068, 3208,

3212, 3295, 3361, 3479

Ferguson 3041, 3320

Fidelity 3000

Finlandia 3081, 3104

Finlux 3081, 3000, 3042, 3104

Firstline 3037, 3045, 3043, 3209, 3072

Fisher 3047, 3104, 3046, 3054, 3066

Frontech 3020

Fuji 3035, 3033

Funai 3000

GE 3060, 3035, 3048, 3240, 3202

GEC 3081

Garrard 3000

General 3020

GoldHand 3072

GoldStar 3037, 3038, 3225, 3471

Goodmans 3037, 3000, 3072, 3278,

3062, 3020

Gradiente 3000, 3008

01RX-V595-e/fCODE(US) 6/23/99, 4:14 PM110

111

Graetz 3240, 3104, 3041

Granada 3081, 3104, 3046

Grandin 3037, 3000, 3072

Grundig 3081, 3072, 3195, 3226

HCM 3072

HI-Q 3047

Hanseatic 3037

Harley Davidson 3000

Harman/Kardon 3038

Harwood 3072, 3068

Headquarter 3046

Hinari 3240, 3072, 3208

Hitachi 3240, 3000, 3042,

3041, 3166, 3235

Hypson 3072

ITT 3240, 3104, 3041, 3046, 3384

ITV 3037, 3278

Imperial 3000

Interfunk 3081

JVC 3067, 3041, 3008, 3384

Jensen 3041

KEC 3037, 3278

KLH 3072

Kaisui 3072

Kendo 3209

Kenwood 3067, 3041, 3038, 3384

Kodak 3035, 3037

Korpel 3072

LXI 3037

Lenco 3278

Leyco 3072

LIoyd’s 3000, 3208

Loewe 3037, 3081

Logik 3240, 3072

Luxor 3048, 3104, 3043, 3062, 3046

M Electronic 3000

MEI 3035

MGA 3240, 3043, 3061

MGN Technology 3240

MTC 3240, 3000

Magnasonic 3278

Magnavox 3035, 3039, 3081, 3000

Magnin 3240

Manesth 3045, 3072

Marantz 3035, 3081, 3062, 3295

Marta 3037

Matsui 3209, 3036, 3208, 3295

Matsushita 3035, 3162

Memorex 3035, 3037, 3048, 3039,

3047, 3240, 3000, 3104,

3162, 3046

Memphis 3072

Metz 3162, 3195, 3227

Minerva 3195

Minolta 3042

Mitsubishi 3048, 3081, 3067, 3043,

3061, 3173, 3196

Motorola 3035, 3048

Multitech 3000, 3072

Murphy 3000

NEC 3104, 3067, 3041, 3038, 3040

Neckermann 3081

Nesco 3072

Nikko 3037

Nikon 3034

Noblex 3240

Nokia 3240, 3104, 3041, 3046

Nordmende 3041, 3320, 3384

Oceanic 3000, 3041

Olympus 3035, 3226

Optimus 3037, 3048, 3104, 3162

Optonica 3062

Orion 3184, 3121, 3209, 3002,

3036, 3208, 3295, 3479

Osaki 3037, 3000, 3072

Otto Versand 3081

Palladium 3037, 3041, 3072

Panasonic 3035, 3162, 3225,

3226, 3227

Pathe Cinema 3036

Pathe Marconi 3041

Penney 3035, 3037, 3240, 3042,

3038, 3040, 3054

Pentax 3042

Perdio 3000

Philco 3035, 3209, 3038, 3479

Philips 3035, 3081, 3062, 3384

Phonola 3081

Pilot 3037

Pioneer 3081, 3067, 3162, 3235

Portland 3020

Profitronic 3240

Proline 3000

Proscan 3060, 3202

Protec 3072

Pulsar 3039

Pye 3081

Quarter 3046

Quartz 3046

Quasar 3035, 3162

Quelle 3081

RCA 3060, 3035, 3048,

3240, 3042, 3202

Radio Shack 3037, 3000

Radiola 3081

Radix 3037

Randex 3037

Realistic 3035, 3037, 3048, 3047,

3000, 3104, 3062, 3046, 3066

Rex 3041, 3384

Ricoh 3034

Roadstar 3037, 3240, 3072, 3278

Runco 3039

SBR 3081

SEG 3240

SEI 3081

STS 3042

Saba 3041, 3320, 3384

Saisho 3209, 3036, 3208

Salora 3043, 3046

Samsung 3240, 3045

Sanky 3048, 3039

Sansui 3000, 3067, 3041, 3271, 3479

Sanyo 3047, 3240, 3104, 3046

Schaub Lorenz 3000, 3104, 3041

Schneider 3081, 3000, 3072

Scott 3184, 3045, 3121, 3043, 3212

Sears 3035, 3037, 3047, 3000, 3042,

3104, 3046, 3054, 3066

Seleco 3041

Semp 3045

Sentra 3020

Sharp 3048, 3062

Shintom 3104, 3072

Shogun 3240

Siemens 3037, 3081, 3104, 3054, 3195

Silva 3037

Singer 3045, 3072

Sinudyne 3081

Solavox 3020

Sonolor 3046

Sontec 3037

Sony 3035, 3032, 3000, 3033, 3034

Sunstar 3000

Suntronic 3000

Sylvania 3035, 3081, 3000, 3043

Symphonic 3000

TMK 3240, 3036, 3208

Tashiko 3000

Tatung 3081, 3000, 3041

Teac 3000, 3041

Tec 3020

Technics 3035, 3162, 3226

Teknika 3035, 3037, 3000

Teleavia 3041

Telefunken 3041, 3187, 3320, 3384

Tenosal 3072

Tensai 3000

Thomas 3000

Thomson 3041, 3320, 3384

Thorn 3104, 3041, 3036

Toshiba 3081, 3045, 3043, 3041,

3066, 3212, 3366, 3384

Totevision 3037, 3240

Triumph 3208

Uher 3240

Unitech 3240

Universum 3037, 3081, 3240,

3000, 3195

Vector 3045

Vector Research 3038, 3040

Video Concepts 3045, 3040, 3061

Videosonic 3240

Wards 3060, 3035, 3048, 3047,

3081, 3240, 3000, 3042,

3072, 3062, 3212

White Westinghouse 3278

XR-1000 3035, 3000, 3072

Yamaha 3038

Yamishi 3072

Yokan 3072

Yoko 3240, 3020

Zenith 3039, 3000, 3033, 3034

01RX-V595-e/fCODE(US) 6/23/99, 4:14 PM111

112

DVD PLAYER

Manufacturer Code

JVC 4558

Kenwood 4534

Magnavox 4503

Mitsubishi 4521

Onkyo 4503

Panasonic 4490

Philips 4503, 4539

Pioneer 4525

Proscan 4522

RCA 4522

Sony 4533

Technics 4490

Toshiba 4503

Yamaha 4490, 4545

Zenith 4503

LD PLAYER

Manufacturer Code

Aiwa 5203

Carver 5064, 5194, 5323

Denon 5059, 5172

Disco Vision 5023

Funai 5203

Hitachi 5023

Magnavox 5194, 5217

Marantz 5064, 5194

Mitsubishi 5059

NAD 5059

Panasonic 5204

Philips 5064, 5194

Pioneer 5059, 5023

Quasar 5204

Realistic 5203

Salora 5064

Samsung 5323

Sega 5023

Sony 5193, 5201

Technics 5204

Telefunken 5059

Theta Digital 5194

Yamaha 5217

CD PLAYER

Manufacturer Code

ADC 6018

Acoustic Research 6420

Adcom 6155

Aiwa 6157, 6012, 6124

Akai 6156

Arcam 6157

Audio Pro 6437

Audio Research 6157

Audio-Technica 6170

Audio Ton 6157

Audiolab 6157

Audiomeca 6157

BSR 6245

Bestar 6164

Burmester 6420

Bush 6245

California Audio Lab 6029

Carver 6157, 6179, 6437

Condor 6164

Crown 6122

Cyrus 6157

DAK 6245

DKK 6000

Denon 6003, 6034

Elektra 6393, 6437

Emerson 6305, 6155, 6164

Fisher 6179, 6048, 6088, 6342

Garrard 6420, 6393, 6245, 6280, 6425

Genexxa 6032, 6305, 6164, 6426

Goodmans 6305, 6245, 6280

Grundig 6157

Harman/Kardon 6426

Hitachi 6032, 6155

JVC 6072

Kenwood 6028, 6037, 6190, 6048

Kodak 6287

Krell 6157

Kyocera 6018

LXI 6305

Linn 6157

Luxman 6093

MCS 6029, 6043

MTC 6420

Magnavox 6157, 6305

Marantz 6029, 6157, 6180

Matsui 6157

Mclntosh 6287

Memorex 6032, 6305, 6155,

6164, 6180

Meridian 6157

Micromega 6157

Mission 6157

Mitsubishi 6156

NAD 6000

NEC 6043

NSM 6157

Nagaoka 6018

Naim 6157

Nakamichi 6147

Nikko 6164, 6170

Onkyo 6101

Optimus 6000, 6032, 6179, 6305,

6037, 6420, 6048, 6145,

6468, 6087, 6280, 6342,

6426, 6437

Panasonic 6029, 6303

Parasound 6420

Philips 6157, 6287

Pioneer 6032, 6305, 6468, 6244

Poppy 6164

Proton 6157

QED 6157

Quad 6157

Quasar 6029

RCA 6179, 6305, 6053, 6155

Realistic 6179, 6420, 6155, 6164, 6180

Revox 6157

Roadstar 6461

Rotel 6157, 6420

Royal 6420

SAE 6157

STS 6018

Sansui 6157, 6305, 6202

Sanyo 6179, 6048, 6087, 6342

Scott 6305, 6155, 6164

Sears 6305

Sharp 6037, 6180, 6261

Sherwood 6114, 6180, 6426

Shure 6043

Sony 6000, 6185

Soundesign 6145, 6425

Tascam 6420

Teac 6420, 6393, 6180

Technics 6029, 6303

Universum 6157, 6437

Victor 6072

Wards 6157, 6053

Yamaha 6036, 6187, 6261, 6082, 6712

Yorx 6461

MD RECORDER

Manufacturer Code

Kenwood 7826

Sony 7490

Yamaha 7888, 7490

01RX-V595-e/fCODE(US) 6/23/99, 4:14 PM112

113

TAPE DECK

Manufacturer Code

ADC 8171

Aiwa 8029, 8197

Akai 8283

Arcam 8076

Carver 8029

Denon 8076

Fisher 8074

Garrard 8308, 8309, 8375

GoldStar 8375

Grundig 8029, 8375

JVC 8244, 8274, 8303, 8304, 8310

Kenwood 8071, 8092, 8233, 8234

Kyocera 8171

Magnavox 8029

Marantz 8029, 8009

Memorex 8099

Mitsubishi 8283

Onkyo 8136, 8282

Optimus 8027, 8220, 8337

Panasonic 8229

Philips 8029

Phonotrend 8337

Pioneer 8027, 8220, 8099

Revox 8029, 8190

Sansui 8029, 8009

Sanyo 8074

Sharp 8231

Sherwood 8337

Sonic 8375

Sony 8243, 8170, 8291

Teac 8280, 8289, 8308, 8309

Technics 8229

Universum 8375

Victor 8274

Wards 8027

Yamaha 8097, 8094, 8478, 8524

01RX-V595-e/fCODE(US) 6/23/99, 4:14 PM113

114

Manufacturer Code

Abex 0032

Acura 0009

Admiral 0093, 0163, 0213

Adyson 0217, 0032

Akai 0208, 0361

Akura 0218, 0264, 0369

Alaron 0216

Alba 0037, 0218, 0371, 0009,

0036, 0235

Allorgan 0294

Amplivision 0217

Amstrad 0371, 0009, 0362, 0369

Anam 0009, 0068

Anitech 0009, 0068, 0076

Arcam 0216, 0217

Asberg 0076

Asuka 0218

Atlantic 0206

Audiosonic 0037, 0109

Autovox 0206, 0076, 0336

BPL 0282

BSR 0294

BTC 0218

Baird 0343

Basic Line 0218, 0009

Baur 0037, 0010, 0554, 0349, 0361

Beko 0370

Beon 0037

Binatone 0217

Blaupunkt 0554, 0191, 0195, 0200,

0213, 0327, 0328

Blue Sky 0218

Blue Star 0282

Bondstec 0247

Boots 0217

Brandt 0109, 0196, 0198,

0205, 0333, 0335

Brionvega 0362

Britannia 0216

Bush 0037, 0218, 0374, 0371, 0294,

0009, 0282, 0036, 0349

CCE 0037, 0217

CGE 0074, 0076, 0084, 0247, 0306

CS Electronics 0216

CTC 0247

Carrefour 0036

Cascade 0009

Cathay 0037

Centurion 0037

Century 0213

Cimline 0009

Clarivox 0037

Clatronic 0370, 0076, 0247

Condor 0370, 0320

Contec 0216, 0009, 0036, 0157

Continental Edison 0196, 0198,

0205, 0333

Crosley 0074, 0076, 0084, 0213

Crown 0037, 0370, 0418, 0009, 0076

Crystal 0431

Curtis Mathes 0093

Cybertron 0218

Daewoo 0037, 0374, 0009

Dainichi 0218, 0215

Dansai 0037

Dayton 0009

De Graaf 0208

Decca 0037, 0072

Dixi 0037, 0009

Dual 0336, 0352

Dual Tec 0217

Dumont 0070

Elbe 0259

Elin 0037

Elite 0218, 0320

Elta 0009

Emerson 0282, 0213, 0361

Erres 0037, 0012

Expert 0206

Ferguson 0037, 0109, 0005, 0073,

0190, 0238, 0287, 0335, 0343

Fidelity 0216, 0361

Finlandia 0208, 0346, 0359

Finlux 0037, 0072, 0070, 0105, 0346

Firstline 0216, 0217, 0294, 0009,

0321, 0247

Fisher 0370, 0217, 0208, 0303

Flint 0455

Formenti 0037, 0320, 0213

Frontech 0264, 0431, 0163, 0247

Fujitsu 0072, 0206

Funai 0294, 0264, 0303

GE 0282, 0093

GEC 0037, 0217, 0072, 0043, 0205

GPM 0218

Geloso 0009, 0213

Genexxa 0218, 0163

GoldStar 0037, 0217, 0109,

0032, 0290

Goodmans 0037, 0217, 0374, 0371,

0072, 0036, 0235, 0317, 0343

Gorenje 0370

Gradiente 0053

Graetz 0163, 0361

Granada 0037, 0217, 0072, 0146,

0208, 0339, 0359

Grandin 0282

Grundig 0037, 0554, 0070, 0191,

0195, 0205

HCM 0009, 0282

Hanseatic 0037, 0320, 0361

Harley Davidson 0043

Harvard 0068

Hinari 0037, 0218, 0009, 0036

Hisawa 0282, 0455

Hitachi 0217, 0036, 0109, 0032, 0043,

0044, 0105, 0163, 0196,

0198, 0225, 0306, 0349

Huanyu 0216, 0374

Hypson 0037, 0282, 0264

ICE 0217, 0371, 0264

ICeS 0218

ITS 0371

ITT 0163, 0361

Imperial 0370, 0418, 0074, 0076,

0084, 0247

Indiana 0037

Ingelen 0163

Inno Hit 0072

Interbuy 0068

Interfunk 0037, 0163, 0247, 0361

Intervision 0037, 0217, 0264,

0102, 0068

Isukai 0218

JVC 0371, 0036, 0053, 0190, 0192

KTV 0217

Kaisui 0216, 0217, 0218, 0009, 0282

Kamp 0216

Kapsch 0206, 0163

Kawasho 0216

Kendo 0037, 0235, 0362

Kingsley 0216

Kneissel 0259

Korpel 0037

Koyoda 0009

Leyco 0037, 0294, 0072, 0264

Liesenk & Tter 0037

Lloytron 0032

Loewe 0075

Luma 0206

Luxor 0349, 0361

M Electronic 0037, 0217, 0374, 0009,

0109, 0068, 0105, 0163,

0287, 0346

MGA 0150

MTC 0216, 0349

Magnadyne 0102, 0247

Magnafon 0102, 0076, 0213

Magnavox 0036

Manesth 0217, 0320, 0264, 0235

Marantz 0037

Mark 0037

Matsui 0037, 0217, 0371, 0294,

0009, 0072, 0036, 0035,

0011, 0208, 0235

Matsushita 0250

McMichael 0043

LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES (Australia model)

LISTE DES CODES FABRICANTS (Modèle pour l’Australie)

01RX-V595-e/fCODE(EU) 6/23/99, 4:14 PM114

115

Radio Shack 0032

Radiola 0037, 0012, 0323

Rank Arena 0036

Realistic 0032

Rediffusion 0361

Revox 0037

Rex 0206, 0264, 0163, 0259

Rhapsody 0216

Roadstar 0218, 0418, 0009, 0264

SBR 0037, 0012, 0043

SEG 0217, 0264, 0036, 0076

SEI 0294, 0102, 0213

Saba 0109, 0075, 0163, 0196, 0198,

0205, 0213, 0287, 0335, 0343

Saccs 0238

Saisho 0009, 0264, 0431, 0011, 0235

Salora 0163, 0349, 0359, 0361

Sambers 0102, 0076, 0213

Sampo 0032

Samsung 0037, 0370, 0217, 0009,

0264, 0032, 0090, 0290

Sandra 0216

Sanyo 0072, 0036, 0011, 0146, 0157,

0208, 0213, 0339

Schaub Lorenz 0361

Schneider 0037, 0218, 0371, 0247,

0303, 0323, 0336, 0352

Sears 0146

Sei-Sinudyne 0010

Seleco 0206, 0163, 0259, 0362

Sentra 0035

Sharp 0036, 0093, 0157

Shorai 0294

Siarem 0102, 0213

Siemens 0037, 0554, 0157, 0191,

0195, 0200, 0213, 0327, 0328

Silver 0036

Sinudyne 0294, 0102, 0213, 0235

Solavox 0032, 0163

Sonitron 0208

Sonoko 0037, 0009

Sonolor 0163, 0208, 0215

Sontec 0037

Sony 0036, 0010, 0011

Soundwave 0037, 0418

Standard 0217, 0218, 0009

Stern 0206, 0163, 0259

Sunkai 0294, 0321

Susumu 0218

Sysline 0037

Tandy 0217, 0218, 0072, 0093, 0163

Tashiko 0217, 0036, 0043, 0359

Tatung 0037, 0217, 0072

Tec 0217, 0247

Technema 0320

Technics 0250

Teknika 0150

Teleavia 0205, 0333, 0343

Telefunken 0109, 0005, 0074, 0084,

0101, 0213, 0262, 0306,

0335, 0343

Telemeister 0320

Mediator 0037, 0012

Memorex 0009, 0250, 0150

Memphis 0337

Metz 0213, 0367

Midland 0032

Minerva 0554, 0070

Minoka 0369

Mitsubishi 0036, 0093, 0108, 0150

Mivar 0216, 0290, 0291, 0292

Motion 0076

Motorola 0093

Multitech 0216, 0217, 0009, 0102, 0076

NEC 0455, 0036

NEI 0037, 0431, 0337

Neckermann 0037, 0554, 0191,

0213, 0349

Nikkai 0037, 0216, 0218, 0072,

0264, 0035, 0032, 0337

Nikko 0317

Nobliko 0102, 0076

Nokia 0361

Nordmende 0109, 0196, 0198,

0213, 0287, 0343

Oceanic 0163, 0215, 0361

Optimus 0250

Optonica 0093

Orion 0037, 0294, 0320, 0321, 0235

Osaki 0217, 0218, 0072, 0264, 0032

Oso 0218

Osume 0072, 0032, 0157

Otake 0317

Otto Versand 0037, 0217, 0320, 0036,

0010, 0554, 0191, 0213,

0343, 0349

Palladium 0370, 0418

Panama 0217, 0264

Panasonic 0250, 0163, 0213, 0214,

0226, 0367

Pathe Cinema 0216, 0320, 0213, 0238

Pathe Marconi 0196, 0198, 0205, 0333

Pausa 0009

Penney 0032

Perdio 0320

Phase 0032

Philco 0074, 0076, 0084, 0213, 0247

Philips 0037, 0374, 0554, 0012,

0043, 0323

Phonola 0037, 0012

Pioneer 0109, 0163, 0287

Profex 0009, 0076, 0361

Proline 0321

Protech 0037, 0217, 0418, 0009,

0264, 0102, 0431, 0247, 0337

Pye 0012

Quasar 0250

Quelle 0037, 0010, 0554, 0011,

0070, 0074, 0084, 0200,

0213, 0306, 0327, 0328, 0361

Questa 0036

R-Line 0037

RBM 0070

RCA 0090, 0093

Teletech 0009

Teleton 0217, 0206, 0349

Tensai 0218, 0294, 0320, 0317

Texet 0216, 0218

Thomson 0109, 0196, 0198, 0205,

0287, 0333, 0343, 0349

Thorn 0037, 0072, 0035, 0074,

0084, 0190, 0192, 0361

Thorn-Ferguson 0343

Tomashi 0282

Toshiba 0036, 0035, 0070, 0243

Trical 0157

Triumph 0243

Uher 0206, 0320, 0303

Ultra 0192

Ultravox 0102

Universum 0037, 0370, 0264,

0105, 0346

Vestel 0037

Victor 0053

Videosat 0247

Videotechnic 0217

Vidtech 0036

Vision 0320

Voxson 0163

Waltham 0217

Watson 0037, 0320

Watt Radio 0102

Wega 0036

White Westinghouse 0037, 0216, 0320

Yoko 0037, 0217, 0264, 0431

Zanussi 0206

CABLE

Manufacturer Code

ABC 1003, 1008, 1014, 1017

Birgmingham Cable Communications

1276

British Telecom 1003, 1105

Cabletime 1161, 1271, 1377

Clyde 1086

Contec 1019

Decsat 1423

Filmnet 1443

France Telecom 1451

GEC 1086

General Instrument 1276

GoldStar 1144

Jerrold 1003, 1276, 1014

MNet 1443, 1019

Magnavox 1032

Memorex 1000

Movie Time 1156

NSC 1156

Oak 1019

PVP Stereo Visual Matrix 1003

Panasonic 1000

Paragon 1000

01RX-V595-e/fCODE(EU) 6/23/99, 4:14 PM115

116

Pioneer 1144, 1260

Pulsar 1000

Runco 1000

STS 1156

Salora 1382

Samsung 1144

Satbox 1375

Scientific Atlanta 1008, 1277, 1017

Starcom 1003

Tele+1 1443

Teleservice 1281

Toshiba 1000

Tudi 1286

United Cable 1003

Videoway 1250

Westminster 1105

Zenith 1000

DBS TUNER

Manufacturer Code

AST 2321, 2351

Alba 2455, 2421, 2362, 2613

Aldes 2288

Allantide 2333

Amstrad 2080, 2252, 2345, 2461, 2501

Ankaro 2369, 2288, 2220, 2519, 2217

Anttron 2421, 2183

Arcon 2368

Armstrong 2243

Astra 2108, 2539

Astro 2520, 2173, 2358, 2501

Avalon 2396

Axis 2369, 2530

BT 2668

Barcom 2217

Beko 2189

Best 2369, 2217

Blaupunkt 2173

Boca 2243, 2513

Brain Wave 2332

Bush 2067

CNT 2520

Cambridge 2344

Channel Master 2362

Chaparral 2053, 2209

CityCom 2394

Commlink 2288

Connexions 2396

Crown 2243

Cyrus 2200

D-box 2723

DDC 2362

DNT 2396, 2200

Diskxpress 2217

Drake 2268

EIF 2417

Echostar 2396, 2871

Emanon 2421

FTE 2331

Ferguson 2183, 2067, 2189, 2336

Fidelity 2252

Finlux 2455, 2108, 2344, 2397

Fracarro 2871

Freecom 2421, 2335

Fuba 2421, 2369, 2396, 2217,

2297, 2417

G-Sat 2183

Galaxis 2288, 2834, 2863

Galaxisat 2321

GoldStar 2335

Gooding 2571

Goodmans 2189

Grothusen 2335

Grundig 2571, 2173, 2189, 2328

Harting und Helling 2333

Hinari 2183

Hirschmann 2502, 2173, 2573,

2287, 2333, 2397, 2398

Hitachi 2455

Houston 2668

Huth 2243, 2288, 2220, 2346

ITT 2108

InVideo 2871

Intervision 2592

JVC 2571

Johansson 2332

Kathrein 2173, 2200, 2092, 2331,

2358, 2394, 2442, 2480, 2504

Kosmos 2331, 2335

Kreiselmeyer 2173

Kyostar 2421

La Sat 2520, 2513, 2464

Lemon 2692

Lenco 2421, 2335

Lennox 2592

Lupus 2369

Luxor 2573, 2108

Manhattan 2455, 2592, 2520

Marantz 2200

Maspro 2092, 2328, 2336

Matsui 2571, 2344

Mediamarkt 2243

Micro Technology 2333, 2539

Minerva 2571

Morgan’s 2243, 2513

Multistar 2331, 2464

Muratto 2335

Navex 2332

Neuhaus 2501

Neusat 2692, 2834

Newhaus 2220

Nikko 2360

Nokia 2455, 2573, 2108, 2328,

2397, 2873

Nordmende 2362

Orbitech 2501

Oxford 2344

Pace 2455, 2183, 2067, 2328,

2336, 2791

Palcom 2297

Palladium 2571

Palsat 2501

Panda 2455

Philips 2455, 2571, 2200, 2292, 2328

Phonotrend 2288, 2592

Planet 2871

Plasmatic 2442

Polytron 2394

Promax 2455

Prosat 2288

Quadral 2362, 2519

RFT 2288, 2220, 2200

Radiola 2200

Radix 2396, 2882

SAT 2321, 2351, 2461

SEG 2421, 2369, 2539

STVI 2417

Saba 2520, 2336

Sabre 2455

Sagem 2820

Salora 2108

Samsung 2287

SatPartner 2421, 2332, 2520, 2502,

2335, 2692

Satcom 2605, 2346

Satec 2183, 2328

Satmaster 2346

Schwaiger 2183, 2394, 2504

Seemann 2396, 2530

Siemens 2173

Skymaster 2288, 2605, 2519

Star Trak 2421

Strong 2421

Sunstar 2513

TPS 2820

Tantec 2455, 2297, 2336

TechniSat 2262, 2501

Techniland 2346

Telefunken 2421

Teleka 2243, 2613

Telesat 2605

Thomson 2455

Tonna 2668, 2346

Triad 2321, 2333, 2335, 2351

Triasat 2501

Unitor 2332, 2217

Universum 2571, 2173

Vector 2333

Ventana 2200

Vortec 2421

Vtech 2351

Wevasat 2333

Winersat 2332

Wisi 2455, 2396, 2173, 2321,

2351, 2372, 2406, 2407

XSat 2889

Xcom Multimedia 2889

Zehnder 2520, 2321, 2331

01RX-V595-e/fCODE(EU) 6/23/99, 4:14 PM116

117

VCR

Manufacturer Code

ASA 3037, 3081

Admiral 3048

Adventura 3000

Aiko 3278

Aiwa 3000, 3037, 3307, 3348, 3352

Akai 3315, 3106, 3041, 3053

Akiba 3072

Alba 3072, 3020, 3278, 3209,

3315, 3352

Ambassador 3020

Amstrad 3000, 3278, 3325, 3332

Anitech 3072

Asha 3240

Asuka 3037

Audiovox 3037

Baird 3000, 3041, 3104, 3107

Basic Line 3072, 3020, 3278

Beaumark 3240

Bell & Howell 3104

Blaupunkt 3034, 3226, 3195,

3003, 3006, 3154,

3162, 3227, 3403

Brandt 3320, 3187, 3321

Brandt Electronic 3041

Broksonic 3209

Bush 3072, 3278, 3209, 3352

CCE 3072, 3278

CGE 3000

Calix 3037

Capehart 3020

Carver 3081

Catron 3020

Cimline 3072

Cineral 3278

Citizen 3037, 3278

Clatronic 3020

Colt 3072

Combitech 3352

Condor 3020

Craig 3072, 3037, 3047, 3240

Crown 3072, 3020, 3278

Curtis Mathes 3041, 3162

Cybernex 3240

Cyrus 3081

Daewoo 3020, 3278, 3045

Dansai 3072

Daytron 3020

De Graaf 3042, 3166

Decca 3000, 3081

Denon 3042

Dual 3041

Dumont 3000, 3081, 3104

Dynatech 3000

ESC 3278, 3240

Elbe 3038

Elcatech 3072

Electrohome 3037

Electrophonic 3037

Emerex 3032

Emerson 3000, 3037, 3278, 3209,

3036, 3043, 3088

Ferguson 3320, 3041, 3107, 3321

Fidelity 3000

Finlandia 3081, 3104

Finlux 3000, 3081, 3042, 3104

Firstline 3072, 3037, 3209,

3045, 3043

Fisher 3046, 3047, 3054, 3104

Frontech 3020

Fuji 3033

Funai 3000

GE 3048, 3240

GEC 3081

Garrard 3000

General 3020

Go Video 3432

GoldHand 3072

GoldStar 3037, 3038, 3225

Goodmans 3072, 3000, 3020,

3037, 3278, 3403

Gradiente 3000, 3008

Graetz 3005, 3041, 3104, 3240

Granada 3081, 3046, 3104

Grandin 3072, 3000, 3037

Grundig 3072, 3081, 3347, 3226,

3195, 3003, 3006, 3007,

3207, 3349, 3403

HCM 3072

HI-Q 3047

Hanseatic 3037

Harley Davidson 3000

Harman/Kardon 3038

Harwood 3072

Headquarter 3046

Hinari 3072, 3004, 3240, 3352

Hitachi 3000, 3004, 3042, 3041,

3166, 3235, 3240

Hypson 3072

ITT 3106, 3046, 3384, 3005,

3041, 3104, 3240

ITV 3037, 3278

Imperial 3000

Ingersol 3004

Interfunk 3081

JVC 3067, 3384, 3008, 3041,

3206, 3207, 3486

Jensen 3041

KEC 3037, 3278

KLH 3072

Kaisui 3072

Kendo 3209, 3106

Kenwood 3067, 3384, 3038, 3041

Kodak 3037

Korpel 3072

LXI 3037

Lenco 3278

Leyco 3072

LIoyd’s 3000

Loewe 3037, 3004, 3081, 3006

Logik 3072, 3004, 3240

Luxor 3106, 3048, 3046, 3043, 3104

M Electronic 3000

MGA 3043, 3240

MGN Technology 3240

MTC 3000, 3240

Magnasonic 3278

Magnavox 3000, 3081

Magnin 3240

Manesth 3072, 3045

Marantz 3081, 3003, 3006

Marta 3037

Matsui 3209, 3004, 3036,

3088, 3348, 3352

Matsushita 3162

Memorex 3000, 3037, 3048,

3046, 3047, 3104,

3162, 3240, 3307

Memphis 3072

Metz 3347, 3195, 3003,

3006, 3162, 3227

Minerva 3195, 3006

Minolta 3042

Mitsubishi 3081, 3067, 3048, 3043

Motorola 3048

Multitech 3072, 3000

Murphy 3000

NEC 3067, 3038, 3041, 3104

Neckermann 3081

Nesco 3072

Nikko 3037

Nikon 3034

Noblex 3240

Nokia 3106, 3046, 3041, 3104, 3240

Nordmende 3320, 3384, 3041,

3297, 3321

Oceanic 3000, 3041

Okano 3315, 3348

Olympus 3226

Optimus 3037, 3432, 3048, 3104, 3162

Orion 3209, 3004, 3036,

3088, 3348, 3352

Osaki 3072, 3000, 3037

Otto Versand 3081

Palladium 3072, 3037, 3006, 3041

Panasonic 3226, 3162, 3225, 3227

Pathe Cinema 3036

Pathe Marconi 3041

Penney 3037, 3042, 3038, 3054, 3240

Pentax 3042

Perdio 3000

Philco 3209, 3038

Philips 3081, 3384, 3403

Phonola 3081

Pilot 3037

Pioneer 3081, 3067, 3162, 3235

Portland 3020

Profex 3322

Profitronic 3240

Proline 3000

Protec 3072

Pye 3081

01RX-V595-e/fCODE(EU) 6/23/99, 4:14 PM117

118

Quarter 3046

Quartz 3046

Quasar 3162

Quelle 3081

RCA 3106, 3042, 3048, 3240

RFT 3403

Radio Shack 3000, 3037

Radiola 3081

Radix 3037

Randex 3037

Realistic 3000, 3037, 3048,

3046, 3047, 3104

Rex 3384, 3041

Ricoh 3034

Roadstar 3072, 3037, 3278, 3240

SBR 3081

SEG 3322, 3240

SEI 3004, 3081

STS 3042

Saba 3320, 3384, 3041, 3206,

3207, 3297, 3321

Saisho 3209, 3004, 3036, 3088

Salora 3106, 3046, 3043

Samsung 3432, 3045, 3053, 3240

Sanky 3048

Sansui 3000, 3067, 3041

Sanyo 3046, 3047, 3104, 3240

Saville 3352

Schaub Lorenz 3000, 3005,

3041, 3104

Schneider 3072, 3000, 3081

Scott 3045, 3043

Sears 3000, 3037, 3042, 3046,

3047, 3054, 3104

Seleco 3041

Semp 3045

Sentra 3020

Sharp 3048

Shintom 3072, 3104

Shogun 3240

Shorai 3004

Siemens 3037, 3081, 3195, 3003,

3006, 3054, 3104

Silva 3037

Singer 3072, 3045

Sinudyne 3004, 3081

Solavox 3020

Sonolor 3046

Sontec 3037

Sony 3000, 3032, 3033, 3034, 3011

Sunkai 3348

Sunstar 3000

Suntronic 3000

Sylvania 3000, 3081, 3043

Symphonic 3000

TMK 3036, 3240

Tashiko 3000

Tatung 3000, 3081, 3041

Teac 3000, 3041

Tec 3020

Technics 3226, 3162

Teknika 3000, 3037

Teleavia 3041

Telefunken 3320, 3384, 3041,

3187, 3321

Tenosal 3072

Tensai 3322, 3000

Thomas 3000

Thomson 3320, 3384, 3041

Thorn 3036, 3041, 3104

Toshiba 3081, 3045, 3384,

3041, 3043

Totevision 3037, 3240

Towada 3322

Uher 3240

Unitech 3240

Universum 3000, 3037, 3081, 3106,

3195, 3006, 3240, 3325

Vector 3045

Vector Research 3038

Video Concepts 3045

Videosonic 3240

Wards 3072, 3000, 3081, 3042,

3048, 3047, 3240

White Westinghouse 3278

XR-1000 3072, 3000

Yamaha 3038

Yamishi 3072

Yokan 3072

Yoko 3020, 3240

Zenith 3000, 3033, 3034

DVD PLAYER

Manufacturer Code

Kenwood 4534

Magnavox 4503

Onkyo 4503

Panasonic 4490

Philips 4539, 4503

Pioneer 4525

Sony 4533

Technics 4490

Thomson 4551

Toshiba 4503

Yamaha 4490, 4545

Zenith 4503

LD PLAYER

Manufacturer Code

Aiwa 5203

Carver 5064, 5194

Cyrus 5388

Denon 5059, 5172

Disco Vision 5023

Funai 5203

Hitachi 5023

Magnavox 5194, 5217

Marantz 5064, 5194

Mitsubishi 5059

NAD 5059

Panasonic 5204, 5496

Philips 5064, 5388, 5194

Pioneer 5023, 5059

Quasar 5204

Radiola 5388

Realistic 5203

Salora 5064

Sega 5023

Sharp 5001

Sony 5193, 5201

Technics 5204, 5496

Telefunken 5059

Theta Digital 5194

Thorn 5014

Yamaha 5217

CD PLAYER

Manufacturer Code

Aiwa 6124, 6157, 6419

Akai 6108, 6156, 6199

Alba 6536, 6288, 6334

Arcam 6157

Audio Research 6157

Audio Ton 6157

Audiolab 6157

Audiomeca 6157

BSR 6134

Bestar 6164

Binatone 6452

California Audio Lab 6029

Carver 6157, 6179

Condor 6134, 6164

Cyrus 6157

DKK 6000

Denon 6003, 6034

Dual 6196

Emerson 6164

Fisher 6048, 6179, 6342

GE 6334

Genexxa 6032, 6164

GoldStar 6525, 6383

Goodmans 6536

Grundig 6157

Harman/Kardon 6108, 6173

Hitachi 6032, 6291

JVC 6072

Kenwood 6037, 6523, 6028,

6048, 6190

Kodak 6287

Krell 6157

Linn 6157

Luxman 6328

M Electronic 6525

MCS 6029

Magnavox 6157, 6038, 6129

01RX-V595-e/fCODE(EU) 6/23/99, 4:14 PM118

119

Marantz 6157, 6029, 6038, 6129

Matsui 6157, 6288, 6307

Mclntosh 6287

Memorex 6032, 6164

Meridian 6157

Micromega 6157

Mission 6157

Mitsubishi 6108, 6156

NAD 6000

NSM 6157

Naim 6157

Nikko 6525, 6164

Onkyo 6101, 6102

Optimus 6000, 6032, 6037, 6536,

6048, 6179, 6196, 6342

Panasonic 6303, 6029, 6367

Philips 6157, 6274, 6287

Pioneer 6032

Poppy 6164

Proton 6157

QED 6157

Quad 6157

Quasar 6029

RCA 6179

Realistic 6164, 6179

Revox 6157, 6113

Roadstar 6461, 6525, 6527

Rotel 6157

SAE 6157

Sansui 6157, 6202, 6513

Sanyo 6048, 6179, 6342

Schneider 6134

Scott 6164

Sharp 6037, 6262, 6265

Sherwood 6114, 6196

Siemens 6516

Signature 6108

Sony 6000, 6490

Teac 6378

Technics 6207, 6303, 6029

Toshiba 6481

Universum 6157

Victor 6072

Wards 6157, 6108

Yamaha 6036, 6082, 6187, 6712

Yorx 6461

MD RECORDER

Manufacturer Code

Kenwood 7826

Sony 7490

Yamaha 7888, 7490

TAPE DECK

Manufacturer Code

Aiwa 8029, 8197, 8200

Akai 8188, 8189

Arcam 8076

Carver 8029

Denon 8076, 8412

Fisher 8074

Grundig 8029

Harman/Kardon 8182

JVC 8244, 8273, 8274

Kenwood 8070, 8071, 8092,

8205, 8233, 8234

Magnavox 8029

Marantz 8029, 8009

Memorex 8099, 8101

Mitsubishi 8189

Onkyo 8136, 8135

Optimus 8027, 8220

Panasonic 8229

Philips 8029

Pioneer 8027, 8099, 8101, 8220

Revox 8029

Sansui 8029, 8009

Sanyo 8074

Sharp 8205

Sony 8170, 8243

Technics 8229

Victor 8273, 8274

Wards 8027

Yamaha 8094, 8097, 8205, 8478, 8524

01RX-V595-e/fCODE(EU) 6/23/99, 4:14 PM119

Quick Reference Card

AMP/TUN

DSP

TAPE/MD CD DVD/LD

POWER

INPUT

EXT. DEC.

A/B/C/D/E

DSP selector

PRESET

UP DOWN

VOLUME

MUTE

SLEEP

(TV POWER)

TIME/LEVEL

DSP program

STANDBY

SELECTOR

DIAL

TEST

EFFECT

ON/OFF

(TV VOLUME)

POWER

(TV POWER)

REC/PAUSE

PLAY

DIR A (TAPE)

SKIP (MD)

REWIND (TAPE)

BACKWARD (MD)

INPUT

(TV VOLUME)

DISPLAY (MD)

PAUSE (MD)

DECK A/B (TAPE)

DIR B (TAPE)

SKIP (MD)

STOP

FAST

FORWARD

POWER

(TV POWER)

PLAY

SUBTITLE

ON/OFF (DVD)

SKIP/SEARCH

SUBTITLE (DVD)

BACKWARD (LD)

INPUT

(TV VOLUME)

DISPLAY

PAUSE

(TV INPUT)

STOP

ANGLE (DVD)

FAST

FORWARD (LD)

AUDIO (DVD)

POWER

(TV POWER)

DISC SKIP DISC SKIP

PLAY

SKIP

BACKWARD

INPUT

(TV VOLUME)

PAUSE

(TV INPUT)

STOP

FAST

FORWARD

DISPLAY

SET MENU

V296050

Transcripción de documentos

CA RX-V595 RX-V595 Natural Sound AV Receiver Récepteur audiovisuel OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 01RX-V595-e/f cv1/4 1 Printed in Malaysia ID V274950 6/23/99, 4:34 PM SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 8 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For example, the unit should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface, that may block the ventilation openings; or placed in a built-in installation, such as a bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation openings. 9 Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances that produce heat. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. 1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated. 2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. 3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. 4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions should be followed. 5 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, etc. 6 Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. 6A A unit and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the unit and cart combination to overturn. 7 10 Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the unit. 11 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the unit. 12 Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as recommended by the manufacturer. 13 Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time. 14 Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the inside of the unit. 15 Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the unit; or C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged. 16 Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit beyond those means described in the operating instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. 17 Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located away from power lines. 18 Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization is not defeated. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. 2 01RX-V595-e/f1 2 6/23/99, 4:09 PM Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. English 19 For US customers only: Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. 3 01RX-V595-e/f1 3 6/23/99, 4:09 PM SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES ACCESSOIRES FOURNIS • After unpacking, check that the following parts are included. • Après le déballage, vérifier que les pièces suivantes sont incluses. • Remote control transmitter • Télécommande • Indoor FM Antenna • Antenne FM intérieure • AM Loop Antenna • Cadre-antenna AM • Antenna adapter (U.S.A. and Canada models only) • Adaptateur d’antenne (Modèle pour les Etats-Unis et le Canada seulement) • Batteries (size AA, R6, UM-3) • Piles (taille AA, R6, UM-3) 4 01RX-V595-e/f1 4 6/23/99, 4:09 PM ● 5 Speaker Configuration <Canada model> Main: 70 W + 70 W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz Center: 70 W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz Rear: 70 W + 70 W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz <Australia and China models> Main: 65 W + 65 W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz Center: 65 W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz Rear: 65 W + 65 W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz ● Digital Sound Field Processor ● 6-Channel External Decoder Input for DTS and other future formats ● Automatic Input Balance Control for Dolby Pro Logic Surround ● Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance Adjustment ● Speaker Output Mode Changing Capability ● 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning ● Automatic Preset Tuning ● Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset Editing) ● Video Signal Input/Output Capability ● SLEEP Timer ● Dolby Digital Decoder ● Dolby Pro Logic Surround Decoder ● CINEMA DSP: Theater-like Sound Experience by the Combination of Dolby Surround and YAMAHA DSP Technology ● Universal Remote Control Transmitter with Preset Manufacturer Codes CONTENTS SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES ........................................... 4 FEATURES .................................................................... 5 CAUTION ....................................................................... 6 ● Information about DSP ● Introduction ● Advanced Information FEATURES ON SOUND EFFECT ................................. 7 CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS ......................... 9 ADJUSTMENTS IN THE “SET MENU” MODE ................................... 43 ● Preparation ● Remote Control Transmitter SPEAKER SETUP ....................................................... 12 CONNECTIONS ........................................................... 14 ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE USING THIS UNIT .................................. 22 REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER ......................... 45 SETUP CODES ........................................................... 50 NOTES ABOUT THE REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER ...................................................... 51 USING DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR (DSP) .............................................. 37 ● Basic Oparation BASIC OPERATIONS .................................................. 27 TUNING OPERATIONS ............................................... 31 SETTING THE SLEEP TIMER ..................................... 36 TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................. 52 SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................... 54 LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES ...................... 108 5 01RX-V595-e/f1 5 6/23/99, 4:09 PM English FEATURES CAUTION : READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1. To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2. Install this unit in a cool, dry, clean place – away from windows, heat sources, sources of excessive vibration, dust, moisture and cold. Avoid sources of humming (transformers, motors). To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not expose the unit to rain or water. 3. Never open the cabinet. If something drops into the set, contact your dealer. 4. Do not use force on switches, controls or connection wires. When moving the unit, first disconnect the power plug and the wires connected to other equipment. Never pull the wires themselves. 5. The openings on the unit cover assure proper ventilation of the unit. If these openings are obstructed, the temperature inside the unit will rise rapidly. Therefore, avoid placing objects against these openings, and install the unit in a well-ventilated area to prevent fire and damage. <Singapore model only> Be sure to allow a space of at least 20 cm behind, 20 cm on the both sides and 30 cm above the top panel of the unit to prevent fire and damage. 6. 7. 8. 9. The voltage used must be the same as that specified on this unit. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may result in fire or other accidents. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. Digital signals generated by this unit may interfere with other equipment such as tuners, receivers or TVs. Move this unit farther away from such equipment if interference is observed. Always set the VOLUME control to “∞” before starting the audio source play. Increase the volume gradually to an appropriate level after playback has been started. Do not attempt to clean the unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General Models only) Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (located at the rear) according to the frequency spacing in your area. Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT AND FULLY INSERT. THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003. 10. Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section regarding common operating errors before concluding that the unit is faulty. 11. When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (ie., vacation, etc.), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 12. To prevent lightning damage, disconnect the AC power plug and disconnect the antenna cable when there is an electrical storm. 13. Grounding or polarization – Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization of an appliance is not defeated. 14. AC outlet Do not connect audio equipment to the AC outlet on the rear panel if that equipment requires more power than the outlet is rated to provide. 15. Voltage Selector (China and General Models only) The voltage selector on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. 6 01RX-V595-e/f1 6 6/23/99, 4:09 PM English FEATURES ON SOUND EFFECT This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital sound field processor. The processor allows you to electronically expand and change the shape of the audio sound field from both audio and video sources, creating a theater-like experience in your listening room. This unit has a total of 8 digital sound field processor (DSP) modes. You can create an excellent audio sound field by selecting a suitable sound field (this will, of course, depend on what you will be listening to), and adding desired adjustments. In addition, this unit incorporates a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder and Dolby Digital decoder for multi-channel sound reproduction of Dolby Surround encoded video sources. The operation of the Dolby Pro Logic Surround or Dolby Digital decoder can be controlled by selecting a corresponding DSP program including combined operations of the YAMAHA DSP and the Dolby Pro Logic Surround or Dolby Digital decoder. Digital Sound Field Processing What is it that makes live music so good? Today’s advanced sound reproduction technology lets you get extremely close to the sound of a live performance, but chances are you’ll still notice something missing, the acoustic environment of the live concert hall. Extensive research into the exact nature of the sonic reflections that create the ambience of a large hall has made it possible for YAMAHA engineers to bring you this same sound in your listening room, so you’ll feel all the sound of a live concert. Furthermore, our technicians, armed with sophisticated measuring equipment, have even made it possible to capture the acoustics of a variety of actual concert halls, theaters, etc. from around the world, to allow you to accurately re-create any one of these live performance environments, all in your home. Dolby Pro Logic Surround This unit employs a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder similar to professional Dolby Stereo decoders used in many movie theaters. By using the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, you can experience the dramatic realism and impact of Dolby Surround movie theater sound in your own home. Dolby Pro Logic employs a four channel five speaker system. The Pro Logic Surround system divides the input signal into four levels: the left and right main channels, the center channel (used for dialog), and the rear surround sound channels (used for sound effects, background noise, and other ambient noises). The center channel allows listeners seated in even less-than-ideal positions to hear the dialog originating from the action on the screen while experiencing good stereo imaging. Dolby Surround is encoded on the sound track of pre-recorded video tapes, laser discs, and some TV/cable broadcasts. When you play a source encoded with Dolby Surround on this unit, the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder decodes the signal and distributes the surround-sound effects. This Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder employs a digital signal processing system. This system improves the stability of sound at each channel and crosstalk between channels, so that positioning of sounds around the room is more accurate compared with conventional analog signal processing systems. In addition, this unit features a built-in automatic input balance control. This always assures you the best performance without manual adjustment. Dolby Digital The built-in Dolby Digital decoder leads you into a totally new sound experiences. Dolby Digital is a new generation of multi-channel digital audio technology, or the newest spatial sound processing format developed for 35 mm film-movies by employing a new kind of low bit-rate audio coding. Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that provides completely independent multi-channel audio to consumers. In multi-channel form, Dolby Digital provides five full range channels in what is sometimes referred to as a “3/2” configuration: three front channels (left, center and right), plus two surround channels. A sixth bass-only effect channel is also provided for output of LFE (low frequency effect), or low bass effects that are independent of other channels. This channel is counted as 0.1, thus giving rise to the term 5.1 channels in total. Compared to Dolby Pro Logic that is referred to a “3/1” system (left front, center, right front and just one surround channel), Dolby Digital features two surround channels, called stereo or split surrounds, each offering the same full range fidelity as the three front channels. Sound of wide dynamic range reproduced by the five full range channels presents listeners much excitement that has never been experienced before. Precise sound orientation by the discrete digital sound processing expands realism that the original movie possesses. LD and DVD are home audio formats that could benefit from Dolby Digital. In the near future, Dolby Digital will also be applied to DBS, CATV and HDTV. The ongoing release of Dolby Stereo Digital theatrical films now underway will provide an immediate source of Dolby Digital encoded video software. 7 01RX-V595-e/f1 7 6/23/99, 4:09 PM Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Copyright 1992 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. • Dynamic range (sound scale) of source can be changed so that it will be suitable for the listening conditions. • Output of low bass from any channel can be assigned to either the MAIN SPEAKERS terminals or SUBWOOFER terminal to maximize system performance. • Output of LFE can be assigned to either the MAIN SPEAKERS terminals or SUBWOOFER terminal to maximize system performance. The following original functions make the surround-sound effect of Dolby Digital become the most suitable for your audio system and the listening conditions. Dolby Surround + DSP (CINEMA DSP) Dolby Surround sound system shows its full ability in a large movie theater, because movie sounds are originally designed to be reproduced in a large movie theater using many speakers. It is difficult to create a sound environment similar to that of a movie theater in your listening room, because the room size, materials of inside walls, the number of speakers, etc. of your listening room is much different from those of a movie theater. YAMAHA DSP technology made it possible to present you with nearly the same sound experience as that of a large movie theater in your listening room by compensating for lack of presence and dynamics in your listening room with its original digital sound fields combined with Dolby Surround sound field. CINEMA DSP The YAMAHA “CINEMA DSP” logo indicates those programs are created by the combination of Dolby Surround and YAMAHA DSP technology. Dolby Pro Logic + 2 Digital Sound Fields Dolby Digital + 3 Digital Sound Fields Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and the rear surround side of the Dolby Pro Logic Surround-decoded sound field respectively. They create a wide acoustic environment and emphasize surround-effect in the room, letting you feel much presence as if you are watching a movie in a popular Dolby Stereo theater. Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and the independent left and right surround sides of the Dolby Digitaldecoded sound field respectively. They create a wide acoustic environment and much surround effect in the room without losing high channel separation. With wide dynamic range of Dolby Digital sound, this sound field combination lets you feel as if you are watching a movie in the newest Dolby Stereo Digital theater. This will be the most ideal home theater sound at the present time. This combination is available when the sound field program DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED/DOLBY DIGITAL ENHANCED, 70 mm MOVIE THEATER/DIGITAL MOVIE THEATER or TV SPORTS is selected, and the input signal of source is analog, PCM audio or encoded with the Dolby Digital in 2-channel. This combination is available when the sound field program DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED/DOLBY DIGITAL ENHANCED, 70 mm MOVIE THEATER/DIGITAL MOVIE THEATER or TV SPORTS is selected, and the input signal of source is encoded with the Dolby Digital (except in 2-channel). 8 01RX-V595-e/f1 8 6/23/99, 4:09 PM English CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS FRONT PANEL 1 STANDBY/ON 6 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Press this switch to turn the power of this unit on. Press it again to turn this unit into the standby mode. Press this button to switch the tuning mode to automatic or manual. To select the automatic tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO TUNING” indicator lights up on the display. To select the manual tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO TUNING” indicator goes off. Standby mode In this state, this unit consumes a very small quantity of power to receive infrared-signals from the remote control transmitter. 2 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control transmitter. 3 Display 7 FM/AM Press this button to switch the reception band to FM or AM. 8 TUNING UP/DOWN This button is used for tuning. Press the UP side to tune in to higher frequencies, and press the DOWN side to tune in to lower frequencies. Shows various information. (For details, refer to page 11.) 9 TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER 4 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Press this button to play a tape or an MD. The “TAPE/MD MON” indicator lights up on the display. When you press the button next, the “TAPE/MD MON” indicator goes off and “EXT. DECDR” appears on the display and you can play the signal connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals. Press this button to store the broadcasting stations. When this button is pressed and held for more than three seconds, the automatic preset tuning begins. 5 EDIT This button is used to exchange the places of two preset stations with each other. 0 INPUT Turn this selector to select the program source (VCR, VIDEO AUX, TV/DBS, DVD/LD, CD, TUNER, PHONO) to listen to or watch. The name of the selected program source appears on the display. 9 01RX-V595-e/f1 9 6/23/99, 4:09 PM q INPUT MODE i BALANCE Switches the DVD/LD and TV/DBS input signal mode (AUTO/ ANALOG). This control is used to raise or lower the volume level. This control is effective only for the sound from the main speakers. Adjusts the balance of the output volume to the left and right speakers to compensate for sound imbalance caused by speaker location or listening room conditions. e PHONES jack o TIME/LEVEL When you use headphones, connect the headphones to the PHONES jack. You can listen to the sound to be output from the main speakers through headphones. When using headphones only, set both SPEAKERS A and B to the OFF position and switch off the digital sound field processor (so that no DSP program name appears on the display) by pressing EFFECT. Press this button to select the setting of delay time or speaker output levels in the TIME/LEVEL mode. w VOLUME p +/– These buttons are used to adjust settings of the SET MENU mode and the TIME/LEVEL mode. In the TIME LEVEL mode, press + to increase delay time or speaker output levels. Press – to decrease delay time or speaker output levels. PHONES a SET MENU Press this button to select functions in the SET MENU mode. s PROGRAM selector Press or to select the DSP program. The name of the selected program appears on the display. d EFFECT Set A or B (or both A and B) to the ON position for the main speaker system (connected to this unit) you will use. Set it (or them) for the main speaker system you will not use to the OFF position. Switches on and off the output from the center and rear speakers so that the sound becomes normal 2-channel. * Even if the output from the center and rear speakers is off, when the Dolby Digital is decoded, the signals at all channels are distributed to the main channels and output from the main speakers. t A/B/C/D/E f VIDEO AUX terminals Press this button to select a group (A to E) of preset stations. Connect an auxiliary video or audio input source unit such as a camcorder to these terminals. The source connected to these terminals can be selected by INPUT. r SPEAKERS y Preset station number selector Select a preset station number (1 to 8). u Tone controls These controls are effective only for the sound from the main speakers. BASS Used to increase or decrease the low frequency response. The “0” position produces flat response. TREBLE Used to increase or decrease the high frequency response. The “0” position produces flat response. 10 01RX-V595-e/f1 10 6/23/99, 4:09 PM English DISPLAY PANEL 1 Multi-information display 6 Signal-level meter Displays various information, for example station frequency, preset station number and name of selected input source. Indicates the signal level of the received station. If multipath interference is detected, the indication decreases. 2 MEMORY indicator 7 When MEMORY is pressed, this indicator flashes for about five seconds. During this period, the displayed station can be stored to the memory. 3 AUTO TUNING indicator Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. 4 TAPE/MD MON indicator Lights up when the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.) is selected as the input source by pressing TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER on the front panel or TAPE/MD on the remote control transmitter. , and indicators “ ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital decoder is on and the signals of selected source encoded with the Dolby Digital is not in 2-channel. “ ” lights up when the built-in digital sound field processor is on, and “ ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder is on. Depending on the selected DSP program, both “ ” and “ ”, or both “ ” and “ ” will light up. 8 SLEEP indicator Lights up while the built-in SLEEP timer is functioning. 5 STEREO indicator Lights up when an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength is received. 11 01RX-V595-e/f1 11 6/23/99, 4:09 PM SPEAKER SETUP SPEAKERS TO BE USED This unit is designed to provide the best sound-field quality with a 5-speaker configuration, using main speakers, rear speakers and a center speaker. The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer and amplifier. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low frequency effect) sound with high fidelity when playing back a source with the Dolby Digital decoded. You may wish to choose the convenience of a YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, which has its own built-in power amplifier. The main speakers should be high performance models and have enough power handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. Other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use high performance models that can reproduce sounds in the full range for the center speaker and the rear speakers. SPEAKER CONFIGURATION 5-Speaker Configuration 4-Speaker Configuration This configuration is the most effective and recommended one. When playing back a source using the DSP program, DOLBY PRO LOGIC/DOLBY DIGITAL, DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED/DOLBY DIGITAL ENHANCED, 70 mm MOVIE THEATER/DIGITAL MOVIE THEATER, MONO MOVIE or TV SPORTS, or when playing back a source which contains center-channel signals (dialog, vocals, etc.) using any DSP program with the Dolby Digital decoded, conversations will be output from the center speaker and the ambience will be excellent. Note: Set the CNTR (CENTER SPEAKER) mode to the “LARGE” or “SMALL” position. (For details, see page 22.) The center speaker is not used in this configuration. When playing back a source using the DSP program, DOLBY PRO LOGIC/DOLBY DIGITAL, DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED/ DOLBY DIGITAL ENHANCED, 70 mm MOVIE THEATER/ DIGITAL MOVIE THEATER, MONO MOVIE or TV SPORTS, or when playing back a source which contains center-channel signals (dialog, vocals, etc.) using any DSP program with the Dolby Digital decoded, the center sound is output from the left and the right main speakers. However, the sound effect of other programs will be the same as that of the 5-speaker configuration. Note: Be sure to set the CNTR (CENTER SPEAKER) mode to the “NONE” position. (For details, see page 22.) Main L Center Main R Main L Dialog Dialog Surround sound Rear R Rear L Surround sound Rear L 12 01RX-V595-e/f2 12 Main R 6/23/99, 4:09 PM Rear R English SPEAKER PLACEMENT When you place the speakers, refer to the following diagram: Main: The position of your present stereo speaker system. Rear: Behind your listening position, facing slightly inward. Nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet) up from the floor. Center: Precisely between the main speakers. (To avoid interference with TV sets, use a magnetically shielded speaker.) Subwoofer: The position of the subwoofer is not so critical because low bass tones are not highly directional. Main speaker Center speaker Rear speaker Subwoofer 13 01RX-V595-e/f2 13 6/23/99, 4:09 PM CONNECTIONS Never plug in this unit and other components until all connections are completed. CONNECTIONS WITH OTHER COMPONENTS When making connections between this unit and other components, be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Also, refer to the owner’s manual for each component to be connected to this unit. * If you have YAMAHA components numbered as !, #, $, etc. on the rear panel, connections can be made easily by making sure to connect the output (or input) terminals of each component to the same-numbered terminals of this unit. Turntable Monitor TV DVD player, LD player, etc. (U.S.A. model) MAIN CENTER SURROUND FM ANT MAIN A OR B: 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER: 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER OPTICAL DVD/LD L SET BEFORE POWER ON L COAXIAL 75Ω UNBAL. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR DIGITAL SIGNAL EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT DVD/LD TV/DBS R MAIN A OR B: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A + B:I6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER SUB WOOFER GND VIDEO SIGNAL GND MAINS AC OUTLETS AM ANT R MONITOR OUT IN DVD/LD TV/DBS PHONO L R R IN OUT (PLAY) (REC) TAPE/MD CD L OUT OUTPUT IN DVD/LD SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL VCR AUDIO SIGNAL L REAR (SORROUND) TV/DBS OUT VCR SUB WOOFER UAL FOR CORRECT SETTING. To AC outlet CD player , Tape deck, MD recorder, etc. TV/DBS tuner VCR (Video cassette recorder) : See the next page. 14 01RX-V595-e/f2 14 6/23/99, 4:09 PM English SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S) GND terminal (For turntable use) (U.S.A., Canada, Singapore, China and General models) ........................................................... 2 SWITCHED OUTLETS Connecting the ground wire of the turntable to the GND terminal will normally minimize hum, but in some cases better results may be obtained with the ground wire disconnected. (Australia model) ................................... 1 SWITCHED OUTLET Use these to connect the power cords from your components to this unit. The power to the SWITCHED outlets is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON or the provided remote control transmitter’s POWER and STANDBY. These outlets will supply power to any component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S) is 100 watts. CONNECTING TO AN EXTERNAL DECODER When using the DTS or other decoder with 6-channel discrete outputs, connect the 6CH DISCRETE OUTPUT terminals of the decoder to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals of this unit. DTS or other decoder with 6-channel discrete outputs 6CH DISCRETE OUTPUT MAIN CENTER SURROUND L L R R SUB WOOFER (U.S.A. model) DIGITAL SIGNAL EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT MAIN CENTER SURROUND COAXIAL 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT OPTICAL DVD/LD L DVD/LD TV/DBS R SUB WOOFER GND VIDEO SIGNAL GND AM ANT MONITOR OUT IN DVD/LD TV/DBS OUT VCR AUDIO SIGNAL PHONO CD L L R R IN OUT (PLAY) (REC) TAPE/MD OUTPUT IN DVD/LD TV/DBS OUT VCR SUB WOOFER DVD player, LD player or other unit with digital outputs 15 01RX-V595-e/f2 15 6/23/99, 4:09 PM CONNECTING TO DIGITAL (COAXIAL AND/OR OPTICAL) TERMINALS Notes • When connecting an audio/video unit to both of the digital and analog terminals of this unit, make sure to connect to both terminals of the same name. • Be sure to attach the covers when the OPTICAL terminals are not being used, in order to protect the terminals from dust. • The input signal from the DVD/LD input terminals is selected in the following order of priority. (input mode: AUTO position) 1 COAXIAL terminal 2 OPTICAL terminal 3 ANALOG terminal • All digital audio signal input terminals are applicable to the sampling frequency of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz. If your DVD (LD) player, TV/DBS tuner, etc. are equipped with coaxial or optical digital audio signal output terminals, they can be connected to this unit’s COAXIAL and/or OPTICAL digital signal input terminals. To make a connection between optical digital audio signal terminals, remove the cover from each terminal, and then connect them by using a commercially available optical fiber cable that conforms to EIAJ standards. Other cables might not function correctly. Even if you connect an audio/video unit to the COAXIAL (or OPTICAL) terminal of this unit, you must keep the unit connected with the same named analog audio signal terminals of this unit, because digital signal cannot be recorded by a tape deck or VCR connected to this unit. You can switch the selection of input signals between “digital” and “analog” easily. (See page 29 for details.) DVD or LD player TV/DBS tuner (U.S.A. model) DIGITAL SIGNAL EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT MAIN CENTER SURROUND COAXIAL 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT OPTICAL DVD/LD L DVD/LD TV/DBS R SUB WOOFER GND VIDEO SIGNAL GND AM ANT MONITOR OUT IN DVD/LD TV/DBS OUT VCR AUDIO SIGNAL PHONO CD L L R R IN OUT (PLAY) (REC) TAPE/MD OUTPUT IN DVD/LD TV/DBS OUT VCR SUB WOOFER 16 01RX-V595-e/f2 16 6/23/99, 4:09 PM English CONNECTING TO VIDEO AUX TERMINALS (ON THE FRONT PANEL) These terminals are used to connect any video input source, such as a camcorder, to this unit. VIDEO AUX VIDEO L AUDIO R R L VIDEO Camcorder 17 01RX-V595-e/f2 17 6/23/99, 4:09 PM CONNECTING SPEAKERS Main speakers A Right Main speakers B Left Right Left (U.S.A. model) SPEAKERS R MAIN CENTER R L REAR (SORROUND) L Rear speakers OUTPUT Left Right CAUTION SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR CORRECT SETTING. SUB WOOFER Center speaker Subwoofer system Note Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. Note on main speaker connections: One or two speaker systems can be connected to this unit. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the SPEAKERS A or B terminals. Note on a subwoofer connection: You may wish to add a subwoofer to reinforce low frequencies or to output low bass sound from the subwoofer channel. If you have a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal of this unit to the input terminal of the subwoofer system. If you have an amplifier and a subwoofer, connect the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal of this unit to the input terminal of the subwoofer amplifier, and then connect the speaker terminals of the subwoofer amplifier to the subwoofer. When the input signals to this unit are in normal 2-channel stereo, this terminal outputs only frequencies below 90 Hz from the main and center channels. When discrete signals are input to this unit and are selected as the input source, this terminal outputs signals from the subwoofer channel. Note on center speaker connection: Center speaker can be connected to this unit. Place it on or under the TV. 18 01RX-V595-e/f2 18 6/23/99, 4:09 PM English How to connect Connect the SPEAKERS terminals to your speakers with wire of the proper gauge, cut as short as possible. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers. Make sure that the polarity of the speaker wires is correct, that is the + and – markings are observed. If these wires are reversed, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. Caution Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. For connecting to the MAIN SPEAKERS terminals For connecting to the REAR and CENTER SPEAKERS terminals Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 1 Unscrew the knob. 2 Insert the bare wire. [Remove approx. 5 mm (1/4”) insulation from the speaker wires.] 3 Tighten the knob and secure the wire. 1 Press the tab. 2 Insert the bare wire. [Remove approx. 5 mm (1/4”) insulation from the speaker wires.] 3 Release the tab and secure the wire. Banana plug connections are also possible (except for Singapore model). Simply insert the banana plug connector into the corresponding terminal. 19 01RX-V595-e/f2 19 6/23/99, 4:09 PM IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SWITCH WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power of this unit is on, otherwise this unit may be damaged. IF THIS UNIT FAILS TO TURN ON WHEN THE STANDBY/ ON SWITCH IS PRESSED, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully set to either end. If so, set the switch to either end fully. Select the position whose requirements your speaker system meets. (Upper position) Main: If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4Ω or higher. If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. Center: The impedance of the speaker must be 6Ω or higher. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR (U.S.A. model) IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 6Ω or higher. (Lower position) SET BEFORE POWER ON MAIN A OR B: 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER: 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER Main: MAIN A OR B: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A + B:I6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER MAINS AC OUTLETS SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 16Ω or higher. L Center: The impedance of the speaker must be 8Ω or higher. Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. 20 01RX-V595-e/f2 20 6/23/99, 4:09 PM English ANTENNA CONNECTIONS Each antenna should be correctly connected to the designated terminals, referring to the following diagram. Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas will probably provide sufficient signal strength. Nevertheless, a properly installed outdoor antenna will give clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may result in improvement. Outdoor FM antenna Outdoor AM antenna Indoor FM antenna (included) (U.S.A. model) 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter AM loop antenna (included) 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT 75-ohm coaxial cable GND GND AM ANT 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter PHONO 300-ohm feeder Ground Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 2 1 3 2 Orient so that the best reception is obtained. 3 * The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. The antenna may be hung on a wall. * The AM loop antenna always should be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. GND TERMINAL For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. Notes • When connecting the indoor FM antenna, insert its connector into the FM ANT terminal firmly. • If you need an outdoor FM antenna to improve FM reception quality, either 300-ohm feeder or coaxial cable may be used. In locations troubled by electrical interference, coaxial cable is preferable. 21 01RX-V595-e/f2 21 6/23/99, 4:09 PM ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE USING THIS UNIT SELECTING THE OUTPUT MODES This unit provides you the following five functions to determine the method of distributing output signals to speakers suitable for your audio system. When speaker connections are all completed, select a proper position on each function to make the best use of your speaker system. (See “ADJUSTMENTS IN THE ‘SET MENU’ MODE” on page 43.) 1. CNTR (CENTER SPEAKER) 4. BASS (LFE/BASS OUT) 2. REAR (REAR SPEAKER) 5. M.LVL (MAIN LEVEL) 3. MAIN (MAIN SPEAKER) DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION 1. CNTR (CENTER SPEAKER) Choices: LARGE/SMALL/NONE Preset position: LARGE LARGE: Select this position when your center speaker is approximately the same size as the main speakers. SMALL: Select this position when you use a center speaker that is smaller than the main speakers. In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the center channel are output from the main speakers (or the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal if the SMALL position is selected on “3. MAIN” and the SW position is selected on “4. BASS”). NONE: Select this position when you do not have a center speaker. The center channel sound will be output from the left and right main speakers. 2. REAR (REAR SPEAKER) Choices: LARGE/SMALL Preset position: LARGE LARGE: Select this position if your rear speakers have a high ability for bass reproduction, or a subwoofer is connected to the rear speaker in parallel. In this position, full range signals are output from the rear speakers. SMALL: Select this position if your rear speakers do not have a high ability for bass reproduction. In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the rear channels are output from the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal (or the main speakers if the MAIN position is selected on “4. BASS”). 3. MAIN (MAIN SPEAKER) Choices: LARGE/SMALL Preset position: LARGE LARGE: Select this position if your main speakers have a high ability for bass reproduction. In this position, full range signals present at the main channels are output from the main speakers. SMALL: Select this position if your main speakers do not have a high ability for bass reproduction. However, if your system does not include a subwoofer, do not select this position. In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the main channels are output from the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal if the SW or BOTH position is selected on “4. BASS”. 4. BASS (LFE/BASS OUT) Choices: SW/MAIN/BOTH Preset position: SW MAIN: Select this position if your system does not include a subwoofer. In this position, full range signals present at the main channels, signals from the LFE channel and other low bass signals that are selected on “1. CNTR” to “3. MAIN” to be distributed from other channels are output from the main speakers. SW/BOTH: Select either the SW or BOTH position if your system includes a subwoofer. In either position, signals at LFE channel and other low bass signals that are selected on “1. CNTR” to “3. MAIN” to be distributed from other channels are output from the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal. When the LARGE position is selected on “3. MAIN”, in the SW position, no signal is distributed from the main channels to the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal, however in the BOTH position, low bass signals from the main channels are output to both of the main speakers and the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal. 5. M.LVL (MAIN LEVEL) Choices: NORMAL (NRML)/–10 dB Preset position: NORMAL (NRML) NORMAL (NRML): Normally select this position. –10 dB: Select this position if the sound output from the main speakers is too loud and cannot be balanced with the sound output from the center and rear speakers. In this position, the sound output from the main speakers is attenuated. 22 01RX-V595-e/f2 22 6/23/99, 4:09 PM English ADJUSTING METHOD Operations should be made while watching the information on this unit’s display. 1 2 1 3 2 3 If you are using the remote control transmitter, set the SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN or DSP position on the remote control transmitter. 3 Front panel or 1 Press + or – once or more to select the position you want. Remote control Turn the power on. Front panel or Remote control or 2 Changes. Press SET MENU once or more to select the title “1. CNTR” (so that “CNTR” appears on the display). Front panel Remote control 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change selections on “2. REAR”, “3. MAIN”, “4. BASS” and/or “5. M.LVL” in the same way. or * After pressing SET MENU once on the remote control transmitter, you can also select the title by pressing . (Pressing goes back one selection.) Appears. 23 01RX-V595-e/f2 23 6/23/99, 4:10 PM SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level balance between the main, center and rear speakers using the built-in test tone generator. When this adjustment is performed, the sound output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, the Dolby Digital decoder and the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder. The adjustment of each speaker output level should be done at your listening position with the remote control transmitter. After completing the adjustment of the output level for each speaker, use VOLUME ( ) on the remote control transmitter at your listening position to check if the adjustments are satisfactory. 2 1 5,9 2 6 3 4 4,7 Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN or DSP position on the remote control transmitter. 8 2 Turn the power on. Front panel Remote control or or 1 Set VOLUME to the “∞” position. Front panel 3 Select the main speakers to be used. Front panel * If you use two main speaker systems, press both A and B. 24 01RX-V595-e/f2 24 6/23/99, 4:10 PM Set BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE to the “0” position. 6 Front panel 5 English 4 Turn up the volume. Remote control Press TEST (so that “TEST LEFT” appears on the display). You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from the left main speaker, then the center speaker, then the right main speaker, then the right rear speaker, and then the left rear speaker, for about two seconds each. The display changes as shown below. Remote control Main (L) Appears. Center Main (R) Rear (R) Rear (L) * If the function “1. CNTR” in the SET MENU mode is set to the NONE position, you will hear the center channel test tone from the left and right main speakers. 7 Adjust BALANCE so that the sound output level of the left main speaker and the right main speaker is the same. Front panel 25 01RX-V595-e/f2 25 6/23/99, 4:10 PM 8 Adjust the sound output levels of the center speaker and the rear speakers so that they become almost as same as that of the main speakers. Remote control a) Press or once or more so that “CENTER”, “R SUR.” or “L SUR.” appears on the display. * Select “CENTER” to adjust the output level of the center speaker and select “R SUR.” or “L SUR.” to adjust the output level of the rear speakers. Notes • Once you have completed these adjustments, you can adjust the overall sound level on your audio system by using VOLUME (or VOLUME ( ) on the remote control transmitter) only. • If you use external power amplifiers, you may also use their volume controls to achieve the proper balance. • If the function “1. CNTR” in the SET MENU mode is set to the NONE position, the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted in step 8. The center sound is automatically output from the left and right main speakers. • If there is insufficient sound output from the center and rear speakers, you may decrease the main speaker output level by setting “5. M.LVL” to “–10 dB”. Remote control b) Adjust the level. * Pressing raises and lowers the level. * While adjusting, the test tone is fixed on the selected speaker. Remote control 9 Press TEST once more to cancel the test tone. Remote control “TEST” disappears. 26 01RX-V595-e/f2 26 6/23/99, 4:10 PM English BASIC OPERATIONS TO PLAY A SOURCE 2 3 1,7 5 2 3,4 7 4 Notes • Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN position on the remote control transmitter. • To operate the CD player, DVD/LD player, tape deck, MD recorder, or other components using this remote control transmitter, set the SELECTOR DIAL to the component to be used. (See “SETUP CODES” on page 50.) 1 3 Set VOLUME to the “∞” position. Front panel Select the desired input source by using INPUT. (For video sources, turn the TV/monitor ON.) See page 29 if you are using an external decoder or playing a tape or an MD. Front panel Remote control or 2 Turn the power on. Front panel Remote control or The name of the selected input source will appear on the display. 27 01RX-V595-e/f3 27 6/23/99, 4:10 PM 4 For the DVD/LD or TV/DBS source, the current input mode is also shown. * To change the input mode for the DVD/LD or TV/DBS source, press INPUT MODE (or the button that you have pressed to select the input source in step 3 on the remote control transmitter) once or more until the desired input mode (AUTO or ANALOG) is shown on the display. (See page 29 for details on switching the input mode.) Front panel Remote control 8 If desired, adjust BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, etc. (see below) and use the digital sound field processor. (see page 37.) Selecting the SPEAKER system Because one or two speaker systems (as main speakers) can be connected to this unit, SPEAKERS allow you to select speaker system A or B, or both at once. or Adjusting the BALANCE control Input mode 5 Adjust the balance of the output volume from the left and right speakers to compensate for sound imbalances caused by speaker location or listening room conditions. Select the main speakers to be used. Front panel Note This control is effective only for the sound from the main speakers. Adjusting the BASS and TREBLE controls * If you use two main speaker systems, press both A and B. BASS: 6 7 Play the source. (For detailed information on tuning, see page 31.) Turn this clockwise to increase (or counter-clockwise to decrease) the low frequency response. TREBLE: Turn this clockwise to increase (or counter-clockwise to decrease) the high frequency response. Adjust the volume to the desired output level. Front panel Remote control or Note These controls are effective only for the sound from the main speakers. 28 01RX-V595-e/f3 28 6/23/99, 4:10 PM Press TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER so that the “TAPE/MD MON” indicator lights up on the display, then play the tape or MD. Front panel Remote control Switching the input mode (for DVD/LD and TV/DBS) or To stop playing the tape or MD, press TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER twice so that the “TAPE/MD MON” indicator and “EXT. DECDR” disappear from the display and the play stops (or press TAPE/MD once on the remote control transmitter). To use a decoder connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals Press TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER once or more so that the “EXT. DECDR” appears on the display. Start the play by operating the DTS or other external decoder, DVD player or LD player. Front panel • Once you play a video source, its video image will not be interrupted even if INPUT for an audio source is selected. • When you select an input source by using INPUT, the DSP program (or no DSP program) that was used when the same input source was selected the last time, will be automatically recalled. Remote control or To stop playing, press TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER once so that “EXT. DECDR” disappears from the display and the play stops (or press EXT. DEC. on the remote control transmitter). When you finish using this unit Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel again or STANDBY on the remote control transmitter to turn this unit into the standby mode. Notes on using INPUT • By using INPUT, you can select the program sources connected to the input terminals on the rear panel. • To play a video source connected to the VIDEO AUX terminals on the front panel, set INPUT to the VIDEO AUX position. • The audio source selected by INPUT will not be played if the “TAPE/MD MON” indicator lights up or if “EXT. DECDR” is displayed. • If you select INPUT for a video source without canceling the selection of TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER on the front panel (or, TAPE/MD or EXT. DEC. on the remote control transmitter), the playback result will be the video image from the video source and the sound from the input source selected by TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER on the front panel (or, TAPE/MD or EXT. DEC. on the remote control transmitter). This unit allows you to switch the input mode only for sources connected to the DVD/LD and TV/DBS input terminals (on the rear panel of this unit) that input two or three types of signals. The following two input modes are provided. AUTO: For the source connected to the DVD/LD input terminals: This mode is automatically selected when you turn the power of this unit on. In this mode, input signal is automatically selected in the following order of priority. 1. Digital input signal from the COAXIAL terminal 2. Digital input signal from the OPTICAL terminal 3. Analog input signal For the source connected to the TV/DBS input terminals: This mode is selected when you turn the power of this unit on if the AUTO position is selected on “10. INPUT” in the SET MENU mode. (For details, see page 44.) In this mode, input signal is automatically selected in the following order of priority. 1. Digital input signal from the OPTICAL terminal 2. Analog input signal ANALOG: In this mode, only analog input signal is selected even if a digital signal is input at the same time. Select this mode when you want to use the analog input signal instead of the digital input signal. Notes on input mode selection • To playback a source with the Dolby Digital-decoded, set the input mode to AUTO. • For the TV/DBS source only, the input mode selected on the function “10. INPUT” in the SET MENU mode is effective when you turn the power of this unit on. • When you want to enjoy a source which has normal 2-channel signals with a Dolby Pro Logic Surround program, select the ANALOG mode. • In the AUTO mode, there may be a case depending on some LD players or DVD players that when you make a search on a source encoded with the Dolby Digital during the play and then the play is restored, sound output is interrupted for a moment because the digital input signal is selected again. 29 01RX-V595-e/f3 29 6/23/99, 4:10 PM English To play a tape or an MD TO RECORD A SOURCE TO TAPE OR MD 4 1 2 1,4 2 1 4 Select the source to be recorded. Front panel Remote control When the tape deck or MD recorder is used for recording, you can monitor the sounds being recorded by pressing TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER so that the “TAPE/MD MON” indicator lights up on the display. Front panel Remote control or or 2 Play the source and then turn VOLUME up to confirm the input source. (For detailed information on tuning, see page 31.) Front panel Remote control Notes • The settings of DSP and VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE have no effect on the material being recorded. • A source that is connected to this unit through digital terminals only cannot be recorded by a tape deck or VCR connected to this unit. • Please check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, compact discs, radio, etc. Recording of copyright material may infringe copyright laws. or If you watch a video software that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, there may be a case that the picture itself will be affected by those signals. 3 Begin recording on the tape deck, MD recorder or VCR connected to this unit. 30 01RX-V595-e/f3 30 6/23/99, 4:10 PM English TUNING OPERATIONS Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN position on the remote control transmitter and select the tuner by using INPUT. Normally, if station signals are strong and there is no interference, quick automatic-search tuning (AUTOMATIC TUNING) is possible. However, if the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually (MANUAL TUNING). 2 3 1 AUTOMATIC TUNING 1 MANUAL TUNING Select the reception band (FM or AM) confirming it on the display. 1 Front panel Select the reception band (FM or AM) confirming it on the display. Front panel or 2 Press TUNING MODE (so that the “AUTO TUNING” indicator lights up on the display). or 2 Press TUNING MODE. Front panel Front panel Confirm that the “AUTO TUNING’’ indicator goes off. Lights up. 3 To tune in to a higher frequency, press the UP side of TUNING once. To tune in to a lower frequency, press the DOWN side of TUNING once. 3 Tune in to the desired station manually. Front panel Front panel * To continue the tuning search, press and hold the button. * If the station where the tuning search stops is not the desired one, press once more. * If the tuning search does not stop at the desired station (because the signal from the station is weak), operate the manual tuning procedure. Note • If you tune in to an FM station manually, it is received in monaural mode automatically to increase the signal quality. 31 01RX-V595-e/f3 31 6/23/99, 4:10 PM MANUAL PRESET TUNING This unit can store station frequencies selected by tuning. With this function, you can recall any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number with which it was stored. Up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) can be stored. 2,1 3 4,2 2,1 2 To store stations 1 2 Tune in to the desired station. (See the previous page for tuning procedure.) 4 Select the preset station number with which you want to store the station before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off from the display. Front panel Press A/B/C/D/E once or more to select the desired group (A to E) of preset stations confirming it on the display. Front panel Remote control or 3 The displayed station has been stored to A1. Press MEMORY (so that the “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about five seconds). Front panel * In the same way, store other stations to A2, A3 ... A8. * You can store more stations to preset station numbers in other groups in the same way by selecting other groups in step 2. Flashes. 32 01RX-V595-e/f3 32 6/23/99, 4:10 PM English To recall a preset station (See the illustration on previous page.) 1 Select the group of preset stations. Front panel Remote control or 2 Select the preset station number. Front panel Remote control or Notes • A new setting can be stored in place of the former one. • For presets, the setting of the reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is turned into the standby mode, or the power plug is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power is cut due to temporary power failure. If, however, the power is cut for more than one week, the memory may be erased. If so, it can be re-stored by simply following the preset tuning procedures. 33 01RX-V595-e/f3 33 6/23/99, 4:10 PM AUTOMATIC PRESET TUNING (For FM stations only) You can also make use of an automatic preset tuning function for FM stations only. Using this function, this unit performs automatic tuning and sequentially stores FM stations with strong signals. Up to 40 stations are stored automatically in the same way as in the manual preset tuning method on page 32. Note that a new setting can be stored in place of the former one. 3 1 2 4 To store stations 1 4 Select the FM. Front panel To tune in to higher frequencies, press the UP side of TUNING once. To tune in to lower frequencies, press the DOWN side of TUNING once. Front panel 2 Press TUNING MODE (so that the “AUTO TUNING” indicator lights up on the display). * If TUNING is not pressed, in a while, the automatic preset tuning begins automatically toward higher frequencies. Front panel Lights up. 3 The automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed. Received stations are stored to A1, A2 ... A8 sequentially. * If more than 8 stations are received, they are also stored to the preset station numbers in other groups (B, C, D and E) in that order. Press MEMORY and hold for about three seconds. Front panel Flashes. If you want to store the first station received by the automatic preset tuning to a desired preset station number. For example, if you want to store the first received station to C5, select “C5” while “A1”, the “MEMORY” indicator and the “AUTO TUNING” indicator flash after pressing MEMORY in step 3. Then press TUNING. The first received station is stored to C5, and next stations to C6, C7 ... sequentially. If stations are stored up to E8, automatic preset tuning stops automatically. When automatic preset tuning is finished The display shows the frequency of the last preset station. Check the contents and the number of preset stations by following the procedures in the section “To recall a preset station” on page 33. 34 01RX-V595-e/f3 34 6/23/99, 4:11 PM EXCHANGING PRESET STATIONS You can exchange the places of two preset stations with each other as shown below. 2,4 Example If you want to shift the preset station on E1 to A5, and vice versa. 1 2 Recall the preset station on E1 (by following the procedures in the section “To recall a preset station” on page 33). 3 Next, recall the preset station on A5 by following the same procedures as in step 1. Press EDIT. Front Panel Flashes. 4 Flashes. Press EDIT once more. Front Panel Shows the exchange of stations is completed. 35 01RX-V595-e/f3 35 6/23/99, 4:11 PM English Notes • You can replace a preset station with another FM or AM station manually by simply following the procedures in the section “To store stations” on page 32. • Even if the number of received stations is not enough to be stored up to E8, the search is finished automatically after searching all frequencies. • With this function, only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it in monaural manually and store it by following the procedures in the section “To store stations” on page 32. SETTING THE SLEEP TIMER If you use the SLEEP timer of this unit, you can make this unit automatically switch to the standby mode. When you are going to sleep while enjoying a broadcast or other desired input source, this timer function is useful. The SLEEP timer can be controlled only with the remote control transmitter. Notes • To set the SLEEP timer for this unit, set the SELECTOR DIAL to a position other than the TV postition. To set the SLEEP timer for your TV, set the SELECTOR DIAL to the TV position. • The components on which the SLEEP timer is effective are the sources connected to the SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. 1 To set the SLEEP time 1 To cancel the selected SLEEP time Press SLEEP once or more to select the desired SLEEP time. Remote control Remote control Press SLEEP once or more so that “SLEEP OFF” appears on the display. (It will soon disappear and the “SLEEP” indicator will go off from the display.) Indicates the SLEEP time. Note The SLEEP timer setting can also be canceled by tuning this unit into the standby mode with STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or STANDBY on the remote control transmitter) or disconnecting the power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. Flashes. Whenever SLEEP is pressed, the SLEEP time will change as follows. (Minutes) 120 90 60 30 The SLEEP timer is off (SLEEP OFF). (The state before SLEEP is pressed.) After a while, the “SLEEP” indicator lights up and the display returns to the indication before the SLEEP timer was set. 2 The unit will be switched to the standby mode automatically at the selected SLEEP time. 36 01RX-V595-e/f3 36 6/23/99, 4:11 PM This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital sound field processor. The processor allows you to electronically expand and change the shape of the audio sound field from both audio and video sources, creating a theater-like experience in your listening room. You can create an excellent audio sound field by selecting a suitable sound field program (this will, of course, depend on what you are listening to), and adding any desired adjustments. The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. The data for these sound fields was recorded at actual locations using sophisticated sound field measurement equipment. Note The channel level balance between the left and right rear speakers may vary depending on the sound field you are listening to. This is due to the fact that most of these sound field are re-creation of actual acoustic environments. BRIEF OVERVIEW OF DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS No. 1 PROGRAM DOLBY PRO LOGIC ( ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio, or encoded with the Dolby Digital in 2-channel. Speaker output: main, center, rear DOLBY DIGITAL ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2-channel). Speaker output: main, center, rear 2 DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED ( ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio, or encoded with the Dolby Digital in 2-channel. Speaker output: main, center, rear DOLBY DIGITAL ENHANCED ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2-channel). Speaker output: main, center, rear FEATURE Reproduces video discs, video tapes and similar sources which are Dolby Surround encoded and bear the “DOLBY SURROUND” logo. The built-in Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder or Dolby Digital decoder precisely reproduces sounds and sound effects of a source encoded with Dolby Surround. The realization of a highly efficient decoding process improves crosstalk and channel separation and makes sound positioning smoother and more precise. Reproduces video discs, video tapes and similar sources which are Dolby Surround encoded and bear the “DOLBY SURROUND” logo. This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35 mm film theater. The Dolby Surround decoding and the digital sound field processing is precisely performed without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field folds around the viewer naturally from the rear to the left and right and toward the screen. Note: If the main channel sound is considerably altered by overadjustment of BASS or TREBLE, the relationship with the rear channels may produce an unnatural effect. 3 70 mm MOVIE THEATER ( ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio, or encoded with the Dolby Digital in 2-channel. Speaker output: main, center, rear DIGITAL MOVIE THEATER ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2-channel). Speaker output: main, center, rear Ideal for reproducing video discs, video tapes and similar sources which are Dolby Surround encoded and bear the “DOLBY SURROUND” logo. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70 mm/Dolby Digital multi-track films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. The three dimensional feeling of the sound field is emphasized, and dialog is precisely oriented on the screen. You can enjoy watching Sci-Fi, adventure movies, etc. with considerable presence. 37 01RX-V595-e/f4 37 6/23/99, 4:11 PM English USING DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR (DSP) No. PROGRAM FEATURE 4 MONO MOVIE ( ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio, or encoded with the Dolby Digital in 2-channel. Speaker output: main, center, rear ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2-channel). Speaker output: main, center, rear This program is designed specifically to enhance mono source programs. Compared to a strictly mono setting, the sound image created in this mode is wider and slightly forward of the speaker pair, lending an immediacy to the overall sound. It is particularly effective when used with old mono movies, news broadcasting and dialog. 5 TV SPORTS ( ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio, or encoded with the Dolby Digital in 2-channel. Speaker output: main, center, rear ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2-channel). Speaker output: main, center, rear This program is furnished with a tight sound field in which the sound will not spread excessively on the front side, but the rear surround side produces a dynamic sound expansion. This program is the most suitable for sports programs. 6 DISCO ( ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio, or encoded with the Dolby Digital in 2-channel. Speaker output: main, rear ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2-channel). Speaker output: main, center, rear This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a very lively city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. 7 ROCK CONCERT ( ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio, or encoded with the Dolby Digital in 2-channel. Speaker output: main, rear ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2-channel). Speaker output: main, center, rear This program is ideally suited for rock music. You will experience a very dynamic and lively sound field. 8 CONCERT HALL ( ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio, or encoded with the Dolby Digital in 2-channel. Speaker output: main, rear ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2-channel). Speaker output: main, center, rear In this program, the center will appear to be deep behind the main speakers, creating an expansive, large hall ambience. Orchestra and opera music are suited to this sound field. Note: When the NONE position is selected on “1. CNTR” in the SET MENU mode, no sound is output from the center speaker(s). 38 01RX-V595-e/f4 38 6/23/99, 4:11 PM English PLAYING A SOURCE WITH THE DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR (DSP) EFFECT 2 2 1 2 Follow steps 1 to 7 shown in “BASIC OPERATIONS” on pages 27 to 28. Select the desired DSP program that is suitable for the source. Front panel Remote control or Press DSP. While the indicator lights up for about three seconds, select a DSP program using the numeric buttons (1 to 8). * If the SELECTOR DIAL is set to the DSP position, you can also select a DSP program using the numeric buttons (1 to 8). 3 If desired, adjust the delay time and the output level of each speaker. (For details, see pages 41 and 42.) Notes • You can select the program for each of the input sources. Once you select a program, it is linked with the input source selected at that time. So, when you select the input source next time, the same program is automatically called. • If you prefer to cancel the DSP, press EFFECT or EFCT ON/ OFF. The sound will be the normal 2-channel stereo without surround sound effect. • When a monaural sound source is played with DOLBY PRO LOGIC or DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED, no sound is heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound is heard only from the center speaker. However, if the NONE position is selected on “1. CNTR” in the SET MENU mode, the main speakers output the sound of the center channel. • If the main-source sound is considerably altered by overadjustment of BASS or TREBLE when this unit’s Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder or Dolby Digital decoder is used, the relationship between the center and rear channels may produce an unnatural effect. The name of selected program appears on the display. 39 01RX-V595-e/f4 39 6/23/99, 4:11 PM This unit incorporates a Dolby Digital decoder and a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder for multi-channel sound reproduction of sources encoded with Dolby Surround. The operation of these decoders can be controlled by selecting a corresponding DSP program including the combined operation of YAMAHA DSP and Dolby Digital or Dolby Pro Logic Surround. To enjoy a video source with the Dolby Pro Logic Surround or Dolby Digital decoded When you select the program DOLBY PRO LOGIC/DOLBY DIGITAL, DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED/DOLBY DIGITAL ENHANCED or 70 mm MOVIE THEATER/DIGITAL MOVIE THEATER, and the input signal of the source is 2-channel stereo, Dolby Pro Logic Surround is decoded. When some program is selected and the input signal of the source is encoded with Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital is automatically decoded. To cancel the effect sound EFFECT on the front panel and EFCT ON/OFF on the remote control transmitter make it simple to compare the normal stereo sound with the fully processed effect sound. To cancel the effect sound and monitor only the main sound, press EFFECT or EFCT ON/OFF. Press EFFECT or EFCT ON/OFF once more to turn effect sounds on. Front panel * The following indicators on the display show you what sound processing is being made. Lights up when the Dolby Digital is being decoded and the input signals of selected source encoded with Dolby Digital is not in 2-channel. Lights up when the digital sound field processor is turned on. Lights up when the Dolby Pro Logic Surround is being decoded. or Notes • If the effect sound is canceled when signals encoded with Dolby Digital are input to this unit, signals of all channels are mixed and are output from the main speakers. • If EFFECT or EFCT ON/OFF is pressed to turn effect sounds off when the Dolby Digital is decoded, it may happen that the sound is output faintly or not output normally depending on the source. In that case, press EFFECT or EFCT ON/OFF to turn effect sounds on, or use input signals not encoded with Dolby Digital. * In addition, for the program DOLBY PRO LOGIC/DOLBY DIGITAL, DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED/DOLBY DIGITAL ENHANCED or 70 mm MOVIE THEATER/DIGITAL MOVIE THEATER, the name of the program on the display will change according to the type of decoding. (For details, see page 37.) Note If the input signals of the source are encoded with Dolby Digital in 2-channel only, the sound processing for them is similar to that for analog or PCM audio signals. 40 01RX-V595-e/f4 40 Remote control 6/23/99, 4:11 PM English ADJUSTING DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS When using the digital sound field processor including the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder or the Dolby Digital decoder, you can adjust the delay time between the main sound and effect sound, and each speaker’s output level as you prefer. 1 2 1 2 Adjusting method If you are using the remote control transmitter, set the SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN or DSP position on the remote control transmitter. 2 Press + or – to adjust the settings for delay time or speaker output levels. Front panel Remote control or 1 Press TIME/LEVEL once or more until the name of item which you want to adjust appears on the display. Front panel or Remote control or 3 Repeat steps 1 to 3 to adjust settings on any other item. * After pressing TIME/LEVEL once on the remote control transmitter, you can also select the name of item by pressing . When pressed, the selection changes as follows: DELAY CENTER Delay time Center speaker output level R SUR. Right rear speaker output level L SUR. Left rear speaker output level SWFR Subwoofer output level * Pressing on the remote control transmitter changes the selection in the reverse order. * Depending on the mode of this unit, you cannot select all items. 41 01RX-V595-e/f4 41 6/23/99, 4:11 PM Adjusting delay time You can adjust the time difference between the beginning of the sound from the main speakers and the beginning of the effect sound from the rear speakers. The larger the value, the later the effect sound is generated. This adjustment can be made to all programs individually. Notes • Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with some sources. • When + or – is pressed, the sound is momentarily interrupted. Program Control range (ms) Preset value 1. 15 to 30 0 to 15 15 to 30 0 to 15 15 to 30 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99 20 5 20 5 20 16 49 9 40 16 44 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. DOLBY PRO LOGIC DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED DOLBY DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm MOVIE THEATER DIGITAL MOVIE THEATER MONO MOVIE TV SPORTS DISCO ROCK CONCERT CONCERT HALL Adjusting output level of the center, right rear and left rear speakers, and subwoofer If desired, you can adjust the sound output level of each speaker even if the output level is already set in “SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT” on pages 24 to 26. Notes • Output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted when the program DISCO, ROCK CONCERT or CONCERT HALL is selected, and the input signal is analog, PCM audio, or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2-channel. • If the function “1. CNTR” in the SET MENU mode is set to the NONE position, the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted. This is because, in this mode, the center sound is automatically output from the left and right main speakers. • Once the output level is adjusted, the level will be the same for all digital sound field programs. Speakers Control range (dB) Preset value CENTER RIGHT SURROUND (Rear) LEFT SURROUND (Rear) SUBWOOFER MIN, –20 to +10 MIN, –20 to +10 MIN, –20 to +10 MIN, –20 to 0 0 0 0 0 Note The values of the delay time, center/rear/subwoofer output level you set the last time will remain memorized even when this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is kept disconnected for more than one week, these values will automatically change back to the original factory settings. 42 01RX-V595-e/f4 42 6/23/99, 4:11 PM The following ten types of functions maximize the performance of your system and expand your enjoyment for audio listening and video watching. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CNTR (CENTER SPEAKER) REAR (REAR SPEAKER) MAIN (MAIN SPEAKER) BASS (LFE/BASS OUT) M.LVL (MAIN LEVEL) For details on “1. CNTR”, “2. REAR”, “3. MAIN”, “4. BASS” and “5. M.LVL”, see page 22. (Once you have selected the appropriate modes, you do not have to change settings unless any alteration is made in your speaker system.) 6. LFE [Adjusting the output level of the LFE (low frequency effect) channel] Control range: –20 dB to 0 dB (in 1 dB step) Preset value: 0 dB * This adjustment is effective only when the Dolby Digital is decoded and the signals of selected source encoded with the Dolby Digital contain LFE signals. Adjusts the output level of the LFE (low frequency effect) channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals of other channels to output them from the same speakers, the ratio of LFE signal level to the level of other signals are adjusted. (See page 7 for details about the LFE channel.) 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. LFE (LFE LEVEL) D.RNG (DYNAMIC RANGE) C.DELAY (CENTER DELAY) GUARD (MEMORY GUARD) INPUT (INPUT MODE) 7. D.RNG (Adjusting dynamic range) Choices: MAX/STD/MIN Preset position: MAX * This adjustment is effective only when the Dolby Digital is decoded. MAX: “Dynamic range” is the difference between the maximum level and the minimum level of sounds. Sounds on a movie originally designed for movie theaters feature very wide dynamic range. Dolby Digital technology can bring the original sound track into a home audio format with this wide dynamic range unchanged. In this position, a source encoded with the Dolby Digital is reproduced in the original sound track’s wide dynamic range providing you with powerful sounds just like in a movie theater. Selecting this position will be even better if you can listen to a source in a high output level in a room specially soundproofed for audio/video enjoyment. STD (Standard): Powerful sounds of extremely wide dynamic range are not always suitable for home use. Depending upon the condition of your listening environment, it may not be possible to increase the sound output level as high as a movie theater. However, in a level suitable for listening to in your room, the low level parts of source sound often cannot be heard so well because they will be lost among noises in your environment. Dolby Digital technology also made it possible to reduce an original sound track’s dynamic range for a home audio format by “compressing” the data of sound. In this position, a source encoded with the Dolby Digital is reproduced in the “compressed” dynamic range of the source suitable for low level listening. MIN: In this position, dynamic range is more reduced than in the STD position. Selecting this position will be effective when you must listen to a source at lower level. 43 01RX-V595-e/f5 43 6/23/99, 4:11 PM English ADJUSTMENTS IN THE “SET MENU” MODE 8. C.DELAY [Adjusting the delay of center sounds (dialog etc.)] Control range: 0 ms to 5 ms (in 1 ms step) Preset value: 0 ms * This adjustment is effective only when the Dolby Digital is decoded and the signals of selected source encoded with the Dolby Digital contain center-channel signals. Adjusting method Operations should be made while watching the information on this unit’s display. If you are using the remote control transmitter, set the SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN or DSP position on the remote control transmitter. or Adjusts the delay between the main sounds (at the main channels) and dialog etc. (at the center channel). The larger the value, the later the dialog etc. is generated. This is for making sounds from the left main, center and right main speakers reach your listening position at the same time. This is achieved by delaying the sound from the center speaker if the distance from the center speaker to your listening position is shorter than the distance from the left or right main speaker to your listening position. 9. GUARD Press SET MENU once or more so that the title of function which you want to change appears on the display. Front panel Remote control or * After pressing SET MENU once on the remote control transmitter, you can also select the title by pressing . (Pressing goes back one selection.) Choices: ON/OFF Preset position: OFF If you wish to prevent accidental alteration to SET MENU and other adjustments on this unit, select ON. The following functions on this unit can be locked by this operation. • Functions in the SET MENU mode • Functions in the TIME/LEVEL mode • Functions when using TEST Press + or – to select any desired position or edit parameters on the function. Front panel Remote control or 10. INPUT (Selecting the initial input mode of the sources connected to the TV/DBS input terminals) For the sources connected to the TV/DBS input terminals of this unit only, you can designate the input mode that is automatically selected when the power of this unit is switched on. AUTO: LAST: Repeat these steps to change and adjust settings on any other function. In this position, the AUTO input mode is always selected when the power of this unit is switched on. In this position, the input mode you selected last time is memorized and will not be changed even if the power of this unit is switched on. * See page 29 for details on switching the input mode. 44 01RX-V595-e/f5 44 6/23/99, 4:11 PM You can use this remote control transmitter to control not only this unit but also other components connected to it. This is factory set to control this unit and most YAMAHA audio components. To control other brands of components, you must preset the remote control transmitter with the manufacturer’s codes listed from page 108. Components which can be controlled There are nine positions that you can select to control connected components with this remote control transmitter. When turning the SELECTOR DIAL, the position changes as follows: AMP/TUN: You can perform basic operations of this unit with the SELECTOR DIAL set to this position. TV: A television can be controlled. CBL/DBS: A cable television or DBS tuner can be controlled. VCR: A VCR can be controlled. TAPE/MD: The code for a YAMAHA tape deck is preset. (Be sure to preset the proper code when operating a YAMAHA MD recorder.) CD: The code for a YAMAHA CD player is preset. SELECTOR DIAL DSP: This unit can be controlled and DSP programs can be selected directly. DVD/LD & DVD MENU: An LD player can be controlled using the DVD/LD position. A DVD player can be controlled using the DVD/LD and DVD MENU position. When using the YAMAHA DVD player (DVD-1000 or DVD-S700), be sure to preset the code number “4490”. Notes 1. The shaded positions in the diagram above indicate that you can preset the code for the manufacturer of your component. Note that you can preset only one code for one position. For details, see “SETUP CODES” on page 50. 2. The DVD/LD and DVD MENU positions • Be sure that the SELECTOR DIAL is set to the DVD/LD position when presetting the code for a DVD or an LD player. The code that you preset to the DVD/LD position is also preset to the DVD MENU position simultaneously. You cannot preset the code for a DVD player when the SELECTOR DIAL is set to the DVD MENU position. • DVD MENU operations cannot be performed for some DVD players. 3. When using a second (and third) VCR (For details, see “To use a second (and third) VCR” on page 50.) • If you are not using a CBL/DBS (cable TV or DBS tuner), the second (or third) VCR can be preset using the CBL/DBS position. • If you are not using a DVD player, the second (or third) VCR can be preset using the DVD MENU position. Note that in this case you must preset a code for an LD player to the DVD/LD position even if an LD player is not used. Basic Operations 1 Select the component that you want to control by turning the SELECTOR DIAL. Note: Turn the SELECTOR DIAL until it stops with a click. 2 Press the desired operation button. Note: Press the button with the remote control transmitter aimed at the front panel. The component name is displayed in this window. Indicator The indicator will flash when the button is pressed. 45 01RX-V595-e/f6 45 6/23/99, 4:11 PM English REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER Faintly colored buttons do not function. ■ AMP/TUN Note: TV POWER and TV VOLUME function if you have preset the code for your TV. 1 POWER t 1 Indicator window: Displays the names of components which can be controlled. Indicator: Flashes in red when the button is pressed. SELECTOR DIAL: Selects the component to be controlled. 2 This button turns this unit on. 2 INPUT Press these buttons to select the program source. 3 EXT. DEC. Press this button when using a external decoder. 4 A/B/C/D/E Press this button to select a group of preset stations. 5 DSP selector Press this button. While the indicator lights up for about three seconds, select a DSP program using the number buttons (1 to 8). No DSP program can be selected after the indicator goes off. 3 4 5 6 y 6 PRESET (+/–) u Press these buttons to select the preset station number. 7 VOLUME ( ) Press these buttons to adjust the volume level. 7 8 (TV VOLUME) 8 MUTE Press this button to mute the sound. To cancel mute, press this button once more, or press the operation buttons of this unit. 9 9 SLEEP (TV POWER) Press this button to set the SLEEP timer. q p a q s r TIME/LEVEL (LEFT) This button is used to adjust the settings of the SET MENU mode and the TIME/LEVEL mode. Press this button to select the item in the TIME/LEVEL mode. f r t STANDBY Press this button to turn this unit into Standby mode. y TEST Press this button to output a test tone for adjusting the output level of the speakers. u EFCT (EFFECT) ON/OFF Press this button to switch the DSP program on or off. p (BACK) Press this button to go back one selection in the SET MENU mode and TIME/LEVEL mode. ■ DSP a (RIGHT) This button is used to adjust the settings of the SET MENU mode and the TIME/LEVEL mode. s (NEXT) Press this button to advance one selection in the SET MENU mode and TIME/LEVEL mode. f SET MENU Press this button to select functions in the SET MENU mode. 2 DSP program 2 Press these buttons to select the DSP program (1 to 8). When you select the input source, set the SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN position. Note: The function of all buttons other than DSP program is the same as with the AMP/TUN position. 46 01RX-V595-e/f6 46 6/23/99, 4:11 PM ■ TAPE/MD 1 Notes: • TV POWER and TV VOLUME function if you have preset the code for your TV. • Be sure to preset the proper code for your MD recorder. TAPE MD 1 POWER 1 POWER This button turns this unit on under the default settings. (The code for a YAMAHA tape deck is preset as the default code.) If other codes are preset, only those preset tape decks having a remote controller with a POWER button will be turned on. This button turns this unit on if you have preset the code for the YAMAHA MD recorder. If other codes are preset, only those preset MD recorders having a remote controller with a POWER button will be turned on. 0 (REC/PAUSE) Press this button to pause recording on a tape deck. q DIR A Press this button to select the playing direction of deck A. (TV VOLUME) (TV POWER) i o p a s d 0 q w e w (PLAY) Press this button to play a tape. e (REWIND) Press this button to rewind a tape. o DECK A/B Press this button to select double cassette tape deck A or B. a DIR B Press this button to select the playing direction of deck B. s (STOP) Press this button to stop operation of a tape. d 0 (REC/PAUSE) q (SKIP) w (PLAY) e (BACKWARD) i DISPLAY p (PAUSE) a (SKIP) s (STOP) d (FAST FORWARD) (FAST FORWARD) Press this button to fast forward a tape. ■ CD Note: TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have preset the code for your TV. 1 1 POWER This button turns this unit on under the default settings. (The code for a YAMAHA CD player is preset as the default code.) If other codes are preset, only those preset CD players having a remote controller with a POWER button will be turned on. 6 DISC SKIP (+/–) Press this button to skip to the next or previous CD. q Press , (SKIP) to skip to the next track. Press to skip to the previous track. w (PLAY) Press this button to play a CD. 6 (TV VOLUME) (TV POWER) DISPLAY (TV INPUT) p q w e s d e (BACKWARD) Press this button to backward the track that is playing. p (PAUSE) Press this button to pause operation. This button functions as PAUSE/STOP for operating YAMAHA CD players under default settings. s (STOP) Press this button to stop operation. This button functions as PAUSE/STOP for operating YAMAHA CD players under default settings. d (FAST FORWARD) Press this button to fast forward the track that is playing. 47 01RX-V595-e/f6 47 6/23/99, 4:12 PM English Faintly colored buttons do not function. For the buttons which are not described here, see “AMP/TUN” on page 46. For details, please refer to the owner’s manual for each component. Faintly colored buttons do not function. For the buttons which are not described here, see “AMP/TUN” on page 46. For details, please refer to the owner’s manual for each component. ■ DVD/LD POWER (DVD) This button turns this unit on under the default settings. (The code for a YAMAHA DVD player is preset as the default code.) If other codes are preset, only those preset DVD players having a remote controller with a POWER button will be turned on. (LD) This button turns this unit on if you have preset the code for the YAMAHA LD player. If other codes are preset, only those preset LD players having a remote controller with a POWER button will be turned on. Note: TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have preset the code for your TV. DISC SKIP (TV VOLUME) (TV POWER) SKIP/SEARCH PLAY SUBTITLE (DVD)/BACKWARD (LD) SUBTITLE ON/OFF (DVD) DISPLAY (TV INPUT) PAUSE STOP ANGLE (DVD)/FAST FORWARD (LD) AUDIO (DVD) ■ DVD MENU Note: TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have preset the code for your TV. POWER (DVD) This button turns this unit on under the default settings. (The code for a YAMAHA DVD player is preset as the default code.) If other codes are preset, only those preset DVD players having a remote controller with a POWER button will be turned on. Numeric buttons CLEAR +10 DISC SKIP (TV VOLUME) (TV POWER) MENU LEFT MENU SELECT SET UP TITLE TITLE/INDEX (TV INPUT) MENU UP MENU RIGHT MENU DOWN RETURN MENU 48 01RX-V595-e/f6 48 6/23/99, 4:12 PM English Faintly colored buttons do not function. For the buttons which are not described here, see “AMP/TUN” on page 46. For details, please refer to the owner’s manual for each component. ■ VCR ■ TV Note: TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have preset the code for your TV. Note: You can control your VCR if you have preset the code for it. POWER CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL ENTER CHANNEL ENTER CHANNEL UP DOWN CHANNEL UP DOWN TV EFFECT ON/OFF (TV VOLUME) (TV POWER) VCR REC Press this button twice to start recording. DISPLAY (TV INPUT) PAUSE PLAY STOP REWIND FAST FORWARD TV MUTE TV SLEEP TV POWER (VCR REC Press this button twice.) TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT (VCR PAUSE) (VCR PLAY) (VCR REWIND) (VCR STOP) (VCR FAST FORWARD) ■ CBL/DBS Note: TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have preset the code for your TV. POWER CHANNEL CHANNEL ENTER +100 CHANNEL UP DOWN (TV VOLUME) (TV POWER) MENU LEFT MENU SELECT DISPLAY (TV INPUT) MENU UP MENU RIGHT MENU DOWN RECALL MENU 49 01RX-V595-e/f6 49 6/23/99, 4:12 PM SETUP CODES Presetting the remote control transmitter Perform the presetting procedure for each component you want to control with this remote control transmitter. Note: If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for the manufacturer, use the original remote control that came with the component. To control your components (MD recorder, DVD player, TV etc.) 1. 2. Turn on the component to be used. Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the desired component (TAPE/MD, DVD/LD, TV etc.). To use a second (and third) VCR You can use the CBL/DBS and/or DVD MENU positions to control a second VCR (and/or third) if a CBL (or DBS) or DVD player is not used. If you are using the DVD MENU position for a second (or third) VCR, you must preset a code for an LD player to the DVD/LD position. 1. 2. 3. 4. Press both VOLUME buttons ( ) at the same time until the indicator flashes twice. Turn on the VCR to be used. Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the CBL/DBS or DVD MENU position. 3. Press both VOLUME buttons ( ) at the same time until the indicator flashes twice. 4. Press MUTE. Use the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit manufacturer’s code for the component to be used. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. If the indicator does not flash, repeat step 3 and re-enter the code. 6. Press POWER (or any other button) on the remote control transmitter to check if you have preset the code correctly. If the VCR cannot be controlled using the remote control transmitter, try entering another code for the same manufacturer. Returning to the default code To return all components to the default code, follow these steps. 1. Press both VOLUME buttons ( ) at the same time until the indicator flashes twice. 2. Enter the code number “9987”. 3. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. To return each component to the default code, follow these steps. 1. Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the component to be return to the default code. 2. Press both VOLUME buttons ( ) at the same time until the indicator flashes twice. 3. Enter the code number “9999”. 4. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. The following codes are preset as the default code. 5. Press POWER (or any other button) on the remote control transmitter to check if you have preset the code correctly. If the component cannot be controlled using the remote control transmitter, try entering another code for the same manufacturer. 5. Use the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit code for a second (or third) VCR. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. If the indicator does not flash, repeat step 3 and 4, and re-enter the code. Default codes POSITION Component Code*1 Code*2 TV TV 0047 0037 CBL/DBS DBS tuner 2566 2455 VCR 3060 3072 VCR DVD/LD DVD player 4545 YAMAHA CD CD player 6187 YAMAHA TAPE/MD Tape deck 8524 YAMAHA *1: Canada and China models *2: Australia model We recommend that you write all code numbers you have preset on the “Quick Reference Card”. 50 01RX-V595-e/f6 50 6/23/99, 4:12 PM English NOTES ABOUT THE REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER Battery installation Remote control transmitter operation range 2 Remote control sensor 1 Within approximately 6 m (20 feet) 3 Battery replacement If the remote control transmitter operates only when it is closed to this unit, the batteries are weak. Replace both batteries with new ones. Be sure to replace batteries within about two minutes. If it takes longer than two minutes, the codes preset for the remote control transmitter will return to the default codes. Notes • There should be no large obstacles between the remote control transmitter and this unit. • If the remote control sensor is directly illuminated by strong lighting (especially an inverter type of fluorescent lamp etc.), it might cause the remote control transmitter not to work correctly. In this case, reposition this unit to avoid direct lighting. Notes • Use only AA, R6, UM-3 batteries for replacement. • Be sure the polarities are correct. (See the illustration inside the battery compartment.) • Remove the batteries if the remote control transmitter will not be used for an extended period of time. • If batteries leak, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come in contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. 51 01RX-V595-e/f6 51 6/23/99, 4:12 PM TROUBLESHOOTING If the unit fails to operate normally, check the following points to determine whether the fault can be corrected by the simple measures suggested. If it cannot be corrected, or if the fault is not listed in the SYMPTOM column, disconnect the power cord and contact your authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for help. SYMPTOM REMEDY The unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON is pressed, or turns into the standby mode suddenly soon after the power is turned on. Power cord is not plugged in or is not completely inserted. Firmly plug in the power cord. The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to the upper or lower end. Set the switch fully to the upper or lower end. The unit does not work normally. There is an influence of strong external noise (lightning, excessive static electricity, etc.) or a misoperation while using this unit. Turn this unit into the standby mode and disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet. After about 30 seconds have passed, connect the power and operate this unit again. No sound or no picture. Incorrect output cord connections. Connect the cords properly. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. Appropriate input source is not selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT. SPEAKERS are not set properly. Set SPEAKERS corresponding to the speakers in use to the ON position. Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. The protection circuit has been activated because of short circuit etc. Turning the unit into the standby mode and then on again will reset the protection circuit. The sound suddenly goes off. Amplifier CAUSE The SLEEP timer has functioned. Cancel the SLEEP timer function. Only one side speaker outputs sound. Incorrect setting of BALANCE. Adjust it to the appropriate position. Incorrect cord connections. Connect the cords properly. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. A “humming” sound can be heard. Incorrect cord connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Make the GND connection between the turntable and this unit. The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to the unit through the MC head amplifier. The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the REC OUT terminals of this unit is in the standby mode. Turn the power to the component on. No sound from the rear speakers. The sound output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the sound output level of the rear speakers. A monaural sound source is being played in DOLBY PRO LOGIC or DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED mode. Select another sound field program suitable for the monaural sound source. The sound output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the sound output level of the center speaker. The center channel mode is in NONE mode. Select LARGE or SMALL. Incorrect sound field program selection. Select the appropriate program. No sound from the center speaker. 52 01RX-V595-e/f7 52 6/23/99, 4:12 PM FM REMEDY CAUSE FM stereo reception is noisy. Because of the characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts, this is limited to cases where the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high quality directional FM antenna. Set TUNING MODE to the manual tuning mode. There is distortion and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust antenna placement to eliminate multipath interference. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use the manual tuning method. Use a high quality directional FM antenna. Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been unplugged for a long period. Repeat the presetting procedure. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. Weak signal or loose antenna connections. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and rotate it for best reception. There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises will result from ligtning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). A television set is being used nearby. Relocate this unit away from the TV. The remote control transmitter does not work. Direct sunlight or lighting (of an inverter type of fluorescent lamp etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of the main unit. Change the position of the main unit. The manufacturer’s code is not set properly. Set the code again. The proper manufacturer’s code for the component to be controlled is not set. Try entering another code for the same manufacturer. The component to be controlled is not selected. Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the proper position. This unit is in the standby mode. Turn the power of the unit on. Others Remote control transmitter AM Use the manual tuning method. The sound is degraded when listening with headphones to a CD player or tape deck that is connected to this unit. 53 01RX-V595-e/f7 53 6/23/99, 4:12 PM English SYMPTOM SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION Minimum RMS Output Power 8 ohms, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD [U.S.A. and Canada models] MAIN L/R ........................... 70 W + 70 W CENTER ......................................... 70 W REAR L/R .......................... 70 W + 70 W [Australia, China, Singapore and General models] MAIN L/R ........................... 65 W + 65 W CENTER ......................................... 65 W REAR L/R .......................... 65 W + 65 W 8 ohms, 1 kHz, 0.07% THD [U.S.A. and Canada models] MAIN L/R ........................... 85 W + 85 W CENTER ......................................... 85 W REAR L/R .......................... 85 W + 85 W [Australia, China, Singapore and General models] MAIN L/R ........................... 80 W + 80 W CENTER ......................................... 80 W REAR L/R .......................... 80 W + 80 W Maximum Power [China and General models only] 8 ohms, 1 kHz, 10% THD MAIN L/R ......................... 105 W + 105 W CENTER ......................................... 105 W REAR L/R ........................ 105 W + 105 W Dynamic Power per Channel (by IHF Dynamic Headroom measuring method) [U.S.A. and Canada models] 8/6/4/2 ohms .............. 100/120/145/170 W [Australia, China, Singapore and General models] 8/6/4/2 ohms ................ 90/110/135/160 W Dynamic Headroom (8 ohms) [U.S.A. and Canada models only] ...... 1.55 dB Power Band Width 8 ohms, 35 W, 0.1% THD ... 10 Hz to 50 kHz Damping Factor (SPEAKERS A) 8 ohms, 20 Hz to 20 kHz ............ 60 or more Input Sensitivity/Impedance PHONO MM ................... 2.5 mV/47 k-ohms CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/ VIDEO AUX ................... 150 mV/47 k-ohms EXT. DECODER MAIN L/R .................... 150 mV/47 k-ohms CENTER/SURROUND L/R/SUBWOOFER .................................... 150 mV/40 k-ohms Maximum Input Signal PHONO MM 1 kHz, 0.1% THD ............. 100 mV or more CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/ VIDEO AUX (EFFECT ON) 1 kHz, 0.5% THD .................. 2.2V or more Output Level/Impedance REC OUT ..................... 150 mV/1.2 k-ohms SUBWOOFER (MAIN SP: SMALL) ........ 4.0 V/1.2 k-ohms Headphones Jack Rated Output/Impedance CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/ VIDEO AUX input, 1 kHz, 150mV, 8 ohms ....... 0.5 V/390 ohms Frequency Response (20 Hz to 20 kHz) CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/ VIDEO AUX to MAIN L/R SP OUT .................................................... 0±0.5 dB RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO MM .................................. 0±0.5 dB Channel Separation (Vol. –30 dB, EFFECT OFF) PHONO MM (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) .................... 60 dB or more/55 dB or more CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/ VIDEO AUX (Input 5.1 k-ohms Terminated, 1 kHz/10 kHz) .................... 60 dB or more/45 dB or more Tone Control Characteristics BASS: Boost/cut ............. ±10 dB (50 Hz) Turnover Frequency ......... 350 Hz TREBLE: Boost/cut ........... ±10 dB (20 kHz) Turnover Frequency ........ 3.5 kHz Filter Characteristics MAIN L/R, REAR L/R (SPEAKER: SMALL) (H.P.F.) .................... fc = 90 Hz, 12 dB/oct. SUBWOOFER (L.P.F.) ..................... fc = 90 Hz, 18 dB/oct. VIDEO SECTION Video Signal Type [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............. NTSC [Australia and Singapore models] ......... PAL [China and General models] ....... NTSC/PAL Video Signal Level ................ 1 Vp-p/75 ohms Maximum Input Level .......... 1.5 Vp-p or more Signal-to-Noise Ratio ............... 50 dB or more Total Harmonic Distortion (20 Hz to 20 kHz) PHONO MM to REC OUT 1 V ........................................ 0.02% or less Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO MM to REC OUT [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] (5 mV, Input Shorted) .......... 86 dB or more [Australia and Singapore models] (5mV, Input Shorted) ........... 81 dB or more CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/ VIDEO AUX to SP OUT (EFFECT OFF) (150 mV, Input Shorted) ...... 96 dB or more Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) MAIN L/R SP OUT ................ 150 µV or less Monitor Out Frequency Response .............................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..................................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Australia and Singapore models] ..................................... 87.5 to 108.0 MHz [China and General models] 100 kHz step ................ 87.5 to 108.0 MHz 50 kHz step .............. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF) (100% mod., 1 kHz) Mono ................................. 1.6 µV (15.3 dBf) Stereo ................................ 23 µV (38.5 dBf) 54 01RX-V595-e/f7 54 6/23/99, 4:12 PM English Usable Sensitivity (DIN) [Australia and Singapore models] Mono (S/N 26 dB) ........................... 0.9 µV Stereo (S/N 46 dB) ........................... 28 µV Alternate Channel Selectivity (±400 kHz ) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models only] .................................................... 75 dB Selectivity (two signals, 40 kHz Dev. ±300 kHz) [Australia and Singapore models only] ......................................................... 55 dB Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] .................................. 81 dB/75 dB (DIN-Weighted, 40 kHz Dev.) Mono/Stereo [Australia and Singapore models] ............................................... 75 dB/69 dB Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo .................................. 0.1/0.2% Stereo Separation (1 kHz) .................... 48 dB Frequency Response 20 Hz to 15 kHz ................................ 0±1 dB Antenna Input .............. 75 ohms, Unbalanced Output Level [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] (100% mod., 1 kHz) ...................... 550 mV [Australia and Singapore models] (40 kHz Dev., 1 kHz) ..................... 550 mV GENERAL Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................................ AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz [General model] .............. AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] .................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Singapore model] ............. AC 230 V, 50 Hz Power Consumption [U.S.A. model] ................................... 280 W [Canada model] .................... 310 W/410 VA [Australia and Singapore models] ..... 300 W [China and General models] .............. 310 W Maximum Power Consumption 5 ch, 10% THD [General model only] ......................... 650 W AC Outlets 2 SWITCHED OUTLETS [U.S.A., Canada, Singapore, China and General models] ............. 100 W max. total 1 SWITCHED OUTLET [Australia model] ............ 100 W max. total Dimensions (W x H x D) .................................. 435 x 151 x 391 mm (17-1/8” x 5-15/16” x 15-3/8”) Weight .......................... 12.5 kg (27 lbs. 8 oz.) Accessories ......................... AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna Remote control transmitter Batteries Antenna adapter (U.S.A. and Canada models only) AM SECTION Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ....................................... 530 to 1,710 kHz [Australia and Singapore models] ....................................... 531 to 1,611 kHz [China and General models] 10 kHz step .................... 530 to 1,710 kHz 9 kHz step ...................... 531 to 1,611 kHz Specifications are subject to change without notice. Usable Sensitivity ............................ 300 µV/m Signal-to-Noise Ratio ............................ 52 dB Antenna .................................... Loop antenna Output Level (30% mod., 1 kHz) ........................ 150 mV 55 01RX-V595-e/f7 55 6/23/99, 4:12 PM 01RX-V595-e/f7 56 6/23/99, 4:12 PM LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES (Canada and China models) LISTE DES CODES FABRICANTS (Modèles pour le Canada et la Chine) TV Manufacturer Code A-Mark 0003 AOC 0030, 0019, 0003, 0052, 0185 Abex 0032 Acura 0009 Admiral 0093 Adventura 0046 Adyson 0032 Aiko 0092 Akai 0030, 0208 Akura 0264 Alaron 0179, 0216 Alba 0009, 0037 Ambassador 0177 Amstrad 0009, 0171, 0177 Anam 0180, 0004, 0009, 0068 Anam National 0161 Anitech 0009, 0068 Arcam 0216 Archer 0003 Audinac 0391 Audiosonic 0037, 0109 Audiovox 0451, 0180, 0003, 0092 BPL 0282 Basic Line 0009 Baur 0037, 0512, 0535, 0554 Baysonic 0180 Belcor 0019 Bell & Howell 0154, 0016 Beon 0037 Blaupunkt 0535, 0554 Blue Star 0282 Bradford 0180 Brandt 0109 Britannia 0216 Brockwood 0019 Broksonic 0236, 0463, 0003, 0426 Bush 0282, 0009, 0037 CCE 0037 CS Electronics 0216 CXC 0180 Candle 0030, 0056, 0046, 0186 Carnivale 0030 Carver 0054, 0170 Cascade 0009 Cathay 0037 Celebrity 0000 Centurion 0037 Cimline 0009 Cineral 0451, 0092 Citizen 0060, 0030, 0056, 0039, 0046, 0092, 0186, 0280 Clairtone 0185 Clarivox 0037 Concerto 0056 Contec 0180, 0009, 0185, 0216 Craig 0180, 0161 Crosley 0054 Crown 0180, 0039, 0009, 0037, 0418 Curtis Mathes 0047, 0054, 0154, 0051, 0451, 0093, 0060, 0030, 0145, 0056, 0016, 0039, 0166 Daewoo 0451, 0019, 0039, 0009, 0037, 0066, 0092 Dansai 0037 Dayton 0009 Daytron 0019 De Graaf 0208 Decca 0037 Denon 0145 Dixi 0004, 0009, 0037 Dumont 0017, 0019 Ectec 0391 Electroband 0000, 0185 Elin 0037 Elta 0009 Emerson 0154, 0236, 0463, 0180, 0282, 0178, 0019, 0179, 0039, 0177, 0185, 0280 Envision 0030 Erres 0037 Ferguson 0037, 0109, 0287, 0560 Fidelity 0216 Finlandia 0208 Finlux 0179, 0037 Firstline 0009, 0216 Fisher 0154, 0159, 0208 Formenti 0037 Frontech 0264 Fujitsu 0179 Funai 0180, 0179, 0171, 0264 Futuretech 0180 GE 0047, 0051, 0451, 0093, 0282, 0178, 0021, 0135 GEC 0037 Geloso 0009 Gibralter 0017, 0030, 0019 GoldStar 0030, 0178, 0019, 0056, 0001, 0002, 0032, 0037, 0109 Goodmans 0179, 0037 Gradiente 0053, 0056, 0170 Granada 0037, 0208, 0339, 0502 Grandin 0282 Grundig 0037, 0535, 0554 Grunpy 0180, 0179 HCM 0282, 0009 Hallmark 0178 Hanseatic 0037 Harley Davidson 0179 Harvard 0180, 0068 Hinari 0179, 0009, 0037, 0283 Hisawa Hitachi 0282 0145, 0056, 0032, 0109, 0151, 0576 Huanyu 0216 Hypson 0282, 0037, 0264 ICE 0264 ITT 0283 Imperial 0418 Indiana 0037 Infinity 0054 Inteq 0017 Interbuy 0068 Interfunk 0037, 0512 Intervision 0037, 0068, 0264 JBL 0054 JCB 0000 JEC 0502 JVC 0053, 0069, 0160 Janeil 0046 KEC 0180 KTV 0180, 0030, 0039, 0185, 0280 Kaisui 0282, 0009, 0216 Kamp 0216 Kawasho 0216 Kaypani 0052 Kendo 0037 Kenwood 0030, 0019 Kingsley 0216 Kloss 0046 Korpel 0037 Koyoda 0009 LG 0056 LXI 0047, 0054, 0154, 0156, 0178 Leyco 0037, 0264 Liesenk & Tter 0037 Lloytron 0032 Loewe 0512 Logik 0016, 0001 Luxman 0056 M Electronic 0009, 0037, 0068, 0109, 0287 MEI 0185 MGA 0150, 0030, 0178, 0019 MTC 0060, 0030, 0019, 0056, 0185, 0216, 0512 Magnavox 0054, 0030, 0179, 0186, 0187 Majestic 0016 Manesth 0264 Marantz 0054, 0030, 0037 Mark 0037 Matsui 0009, 0035, 0037, 0177, 0208 Matsushita 0250 Mediator 0037 Megatron 0178, 0145, 0003 Memorex 0154, 0250, 0150, 0178, 0056, 0016, 0009 108 01RX-V595-e/fCODE(US) 108 6/23/99, 4:14 PM Metz Midland 0535 0047, 0017, 0051, 0039, 0032, 0135 Minerva 0535, 0554 Minutz 0021 Mitsubishi 0093, 0150, 0178, 0019, 0512, 0535 Mivar 0216 Motorola 0093 Multitech 0180, 0009, 0216 NAD 0156, 0178, 0166 NEC 0030, 0019, 0056, 0170 NEI 0037 NTC 0092 Neckermann 0037, 0554 Nesco 0179 Nikkai 0032, 0035, 0037, 0216, 0264 Nikko 0030, 0178, 0092 Nisato 0391 Nordmende 0109, 0287, 0560 Noshi 0018 Onwa 0180 Optimus 0154, 0250, 0166 Optonica 0093, 0165 Orion 0236, 0463, 0179, 0037, 0177 Osaki 0032, 0264 Osume 0032 Otto Versand 0037, 0512, 0535, 0554 Palladium 0418 Panama 0264 Panasonic 0051, 0250, 0226 Pathe Cinema 0216 Pausa 0009 Penney 0047, 0156, 0051, 0060, 0030, 0178, 0021, 0019, 0018, 0056, 0039, 0002, 0003, 0032, 0135, 0149 Phase 0032 Philco 0054, 0463, 0030, 0145, 0019 Philips 0054, 0037, 0554 Phonola 0037 Pilot 0030, 0019, 0039 Pioneer 0109, 0166, 0287 Portland 0019, 0039, 0092 Prism 0051 Profex 0009 Proscan 0047 Protech 0009, 0037, 0264, 0418 Proton 0178, 0003, 0052 Pulsar 0017, 0019 Quasar 0051, 0250, 0165 Quelle 0037, 0252, 0512, 0535, 0554 R-Line 0037 RCA 0047, 0051, 0093, 0019, 0018, 0090, 0135 Radio Shack 0047, 0154, 0165, 0180, 0030, 0178, 0019, 0056, 0039, 0032 Radiola 0037 Realistic 0154, 0165, 0180, 0030, 0178, 0019, 0056, 0039, 0032 Revox 0037 Rex Rhapsody Roadstar Runco SBR SEG SEI SSS Saba Saisho Sampo Samsung 0264 0185, 0216 0009, 0264, 0418 0017, 0030 0037 0264 0177 0180, 0019 0109, 0287 0009, 0177, 0264 0030, 0039, 0032, 0052 0060, 0030, 0178, 0019, 0056, 0039, 0009, 0032, 0037, 0090, 0264, 0427 Samsux 0039 Sandra 0216 Sansei 0451 Sansui 0463 Sanyo 0154, 0159, 0208, 0339 Schneider 0037 Scimitsu 0019 Scotch 0178 Scott 0236, 0180, 0178, 0019, 0179 Sears 0047, 0054, 0154, 0156, 0178, 0179, 0056, 0149, 0159, 0171 Semivox 0180 Semp 0156 Sentra 0035, 0283 Sharp 0093, 0165, 0039 Shogun 0019 Siemens 0037, 0535, 0554 Signature 0016 Simpson 0186, 0187 Sinudyne 0177 Solavox 0032 Sonitron 0208 Sonoko 0009, 0037 Sonolor 0208 Sontec 0037 Sony 0000, 0080 Soundesign 0180, 0178, 0179, 0186 Soundwave 0037, 0418 Spectricon 0003 Squareview 0171 Standard 0009 Starlite 0180 Supra 0056 Supre-Macy 0046 Supreme 0000 Sylvania 0054, 0030 Symphonic 0171 Sysline 0037 TMK 0178, 0056, 0177 Tandy 0093 Tatung 0003, 0037 Technics 0051, 0250 Technol Ace 0179 Techwood 0051, 0056, 0003 Teknika 0054, 0180, 0150, 0060, 0019, 0179, 0056, 0016, 0039, 0092, 0186 Telefunken 0056, 0109, 0252 Teletech Teleton Texet Thomson Thorn Tomashi Toshiba 0009 0186 0216 0109, 0287 0035, 0037, 0512, 0535 0282 0154, 0156, 0060, 0035, 0149, 0502 Tosonic 0185 Totevision 0039 Triumph 0177 Ultra 0391 Universum 0037, 0264, 0535 Vector Research 0030 Vestel 0037 Victor 0053 Vidikron 0054 Vidtech 0178, 0019 Viking 0046 Wards 0054, 0165, 0030, 0178, 0021, 0019, 0179, 0056, 0016, 0080 Watson 0037 White Westinghouse 0037, 0216 Yamaha 0030, 0019 Yoko 0037, 0264 Zenith 0017, 0016, 0092 Zonda 0003 CABLE Manufacturer Code ABC 1003, 1008, 1014, 1011 Allegro 1315 Archer 1797 BBT 1267 Belcor 1056 British Telecom 1003 Cable Star 1056 Citizen 1315 Colour Voice 1031 Comtronics 1040 Contec 1019 Emerson 1797 Everquest 1015, 1040 Focus 1400 GC Electronics 1056 Gemini 1015 General Instrument 1476, 1011 GoldStar 1144, 1040 Goodmind 1797 Hamlin 1020, 1259, 1009, 1034 Hitachi 1011 Jasco 1315 Jerrold 1003, 1012, 1476, 1014, 1015, 1011, 1024 MNet 1019 Magnavox 1027 Memorex 1000 Movie Time 1063 109 01RX-V595-e/fCODE(US) 109 6/23/99, 4:14 PM NSC 1063 Novaplex 1618 Oak 1019 Optimus 1021 PVP Stereo Visual Matrix 1003 Panasonic 1000, 1107, 1021 Paragon 1000 Philips 1027, 1031 Pioneer 1144, 1533 Popular Mechanics 1400 Prelude 1770 Pulsar 1000 RCA 1021 Radio Shack 1015, 1315 Recoton 1400 Regal 1020, 1259 Rembrandt 1011 Runco 1000 SL Marx 1040 Samsung 1144, 1040 Scientific Atlanta 1008, 1477 Signal 1015, 1040 Signature 1011 Sprucer 1021 StarSight 1422 Starcom 1003, 1015 Stargate 1015, 1040, 1770, 1797 Starquest 1015 TV86 1063 TeleCaption 1221 Teleview 1040 Timeless 1418 Tocom 1012 Toshiba 1000 Tusa 1015 United Cable 1003 Universal 1056, 1191 Viewstar 1063, 1027 Zenith 1000, 1054, 1525 Zentek 1400 JSR JVC Jerrold Lemon NEC Neusat Next-Wave Primestar Radix SAT SatPartner Seemann Triad Wisi Zehnder DBS TUNER ASA 3037, 3081 Admiral 3048 Adventura 3000 Aiko 3278 Aiwa 3037, 3000 Akai 3041, 3061, 3281, 3288 Akiba 3072 Akura 3271 Alba 3209, 3072, 3278, 3020, 3295 Ambassador 3020 American High 3035 Amstrad 3000, 3278 Anitech 3072 Asha 3240 Asuka 3037 Audiovox 3037 Baird 3000, 3104, 3041 Basic Line 3072, 3278, 3020 Beaumark 3240 Bell & Howell 3104 Manufacturer Code AST Audio Ton Avalon Chaparral Connexions DNT Echostar Elta Expressvu Fuba Galaxis Galaxisat General Instrument Huth 2321 2364 2396 2053, 2209 2396 2396 2396 2364 2775 2396 2364 2321 2361 2364 2364 2775 2361 2692 2507 2692 2732 2361 2396 2321 2692 2396 2321 2321, 2396 2321 (DSS) AlphaStar Echostar General Instrument HTS Hitachi Hughes Network System Jerrold Magnavox Memorex Panasonic Philips Primestar RCA Sony Star Choice Toshiba Uniden 2772 2775 2869 2775 2819 2749 2627 2724 2724 2701 2724 2627 2566 2639 2869 2790 2724 VCR Manufacturer Code Blaupunkt 3162, 3034, 3195, 3226, 3227 Brandt 3187, 3320 Brandt Electronic 3041 Broksonic 3184, 3121, 3209, 3002, 3295, 3361, 3479 Bush 3209, 3072, 3278 CCE 3072, 3278 CGE 3000 Calix 3037 Canon 3035 Capehart 3020 Carver 3081 Catron 3020 Cimline 3072 Cineral 3278 Citizen 3037, 3278 Clatronic 3020 Colt 3072 Condor 3020 Craig 3037, 3047, 3240, 3072, 3271 Crown 3072, 3278, 3020 Curtis Mathes 3060, 3035, 3041, 3162 Cybernex 3240 Cyrus 3081 Daewoo 3045, 3278, 3020 Dansai 3072 Daytron 3020 De Graaf 3042, 3166 Decca 3081, 3000 Denon 3042 Dual 3041 Dumont 3081, 3000, 3104 Dynatech 3000 ESC 3240, 3278 Elbe 3038 Elcatech 3072 Electrohome 3037 Electrophonic 3037 Emerex 3032 Emerson 3037, 3184, 3000, 3121, 3043, 3209, 3002, 3278, 3036, 3061, 3068, 3208, 3212, 3295, 3361, 3479 Ferguson 3041, 3320 Fidelity 3000 Finlandia 3081, 3104 Finlux 3081, 3000, 3042, 3104 Firstline 3037, 3045, 3043, 3209, 3072 Fisher 3047, 3104, 3046, 3054, 3066 Frontech 3020 Fuji 3035, 3033 Funai 3000 GE 3060, 3035, 3048, 3240, 3202 GEC 3081 Garrard 3000 General 3020 GoldHand 3072 GoldStar 3037, 3038, 3225, 3471 Goodmans 3037, 3000, 3072, 3278, 3062, 3020 Gradiente 3000, 3008 110 01RX-V595-e/fCODE(US) 110 6/23/99, 4:14 PM Graetz 3240, 3104, 3041 Granada 3081, 3104, 3046 Grandin 3037, 3000, 3072 Grundig 3081, 3072, 3195, 3226 HCM 3072 HI-Q 3047 Hanseatic 3037 Harley Davidson 3000 Harman/Kardon 3038 Harwood 3072, 3068 Headquarter 3046 Hinari 3240, 3072, 3208 Hitachi 3240, 3000, 3042, 3041, 3166, 3235 Hypson 3072 ITT 3240, 3104, 3041, 3046, 3384 ITV 3037, 3278 Imperial 3000 Interfunk 3081 JVC 3067, 3041, 3008, 3384 Jensen 3041 KEC 3037, 3278 KLH 3072 Kaisui 3072 Kendo 3209 Kenwood 3067, 3041, 3038, 3384 Kodak 3035, 3037 Korpel 3072 LXI 3037 Lenco 3278 Leyco 3072 LIoyd’s 3000, 3208 Loewe 3037, 3081 Logik 3240, 3072 Luxor 3048, 3104, 3043, 3062, 3046 M Electronic 3000 MEI 3035 MGA 3240, 3043, 3061 MGN Technology 3240 MTC 3240, 3000 Magnasonic 3278 Magnavox 3035, 3039, 3081, 3000 Magnin 3240 Manesth 3045, 3072 Marantz 3035, 3081, 3062, 3295 Marta 3037 Matsui 3209, 3036, 3208, 3295 Matsushita 3035, 3162 Memorex 3035, 3037, 3048, 3039, 3047, 3240, 3000, 3104, 3162, 3046 Memphis 3072 Metz 3162, 3195, 3227 Minerva 3195 Minolta 3042 Mitsubishi 3048, 3081, 3067, 3043, 3061, 3173, 3196 Motorola 3035, 3048 Multitech 3000, 3072 Murphy 3000 NEC 3104, 3067, 3041, 3038, 3040 Neckermann 3081 Nesco Nikko Nikon Noblex Nokia Nordmende Oceanic Olympus Optimus Optonica Orion 3072 3037 3034 3240 3240, 3104, 3041, 3046 3041, 3320, 3384 3000, 3041 3035, 3226 3037, 3048, 3104, 3162 3062 3184, 3121, 3209, 3002, 3036, 3208, 3295, 3479 Osaki 3037, 3000, 3072 Otto Versand 3081 Palladium 3037, 3041, 3072 Panasonic 3035, 3162, 3225, 3226, 3227 Pathe Cinema 3036 Pathe Marconi 3041 Penney 3035, 3037, 3240, 3042, 3038, 3040, 3054 Pentax 3042 Perdio 3000 Philco 3035, 3209, 3038, 3479 Philips 3035, 3081, 3062, 3384 Phonola 3081 Pilot 3037 Pioneer 3081, 3067, 3162, 3235 Portland 3020 Profitronic 3240 Proline 3000 Proscan 3060, 3202 Protec 3072 Pulsar 3039 Pye 3081 Quarter 3046 Quartz 3046 Quasar 3035, 3162 Quelle 3081 RCA 3060, 3035, 3048, 3240, 3042, 3202 Radio Shack 3037, 3000 Radiola 3081 Radix 3037 Randex 3037 Realistic 3035, 3037, 3048, 3047, 3000, 3104, 3062, 3046, 3066 Rex 3041, 3384 Ricoh 3034 Roadstar 3037, 3240, 3072, 3278 Runco 3039 SBR 3081 SEG 3240 SEI 3081 STS 3042 Saba 3041, 3320, 3384 Saisho 3209, 3036, 3208 Salora 3043, 3046 Samsung 3240, 3045 Sanky 3048, 3039 Sansui 3000, 3067, 3041, 3271, 3479 Sanyo 3047, 3240, 3104, 3046 Schaub Lorenz 3000, 3104, 3041 Schneider 3081, 3000, 3072 Scott 3184, 3045, 3121, 3043, 3212 Sears 3035, 3037, 3047, 3000, 3042, 3104, 3046, 3054, 3066 Seleco 3041 Semp 3045 Sentra 3020 Sharp 3048, 3062 Shintom 3104, 3072 Shogun 3240 Siemens 3037, 3081, 3104, 3054, 3195 Silva 3037 Singer 3045, 3072 Sinudyne 3081 Solavox 3020 Sonolor 3046 Sontec 3037 Sony 3035, 3032, 3000, 3033, 3034 Sunstar 3000 Suntronic 3000 Sylvania 3035, 3081, 3000, 3043 Symphonic 3000 TMK 3240, 3036, 3208 Tashiko 3000 Tatung 3081, 3000, 3041 Teac 3000, 3041 Tec 3020 Technics 3035, 3162, 3226 Teknika 3035, 3037, 3000 Teleavia 3041 Telefunken 3041, 3187, 3320, 3384 Tenosal 3072 Tensai 3000 Thomas 3000 Thomson 3041, 3320, 3384 Thorn 3104, 3041, 3036 Toshiba 3081, 3045, 3043, 3041, 3066, 3212, 3366, 3384 Totevision 3037, 3240 Triumph 3208 Uher 3240 Unitech 3240 Universum 3037, 3081, 3240, 3000, 3195 Vector 3045 Vector Research 3038, 3040 Video Concepts 3045, 3040, 3061 Videosonic 3240 Wards 3060, 3035, 3048, 3047, 3081, 3240, 3000, 3042, 3072, 3062, 3212 White Westinghouse 3278 XR-1000 3035, 3000, 3072 Yamaha 3038 Yamishi 3072 Yokan 3072 Yoko 3240, 3020 Zenith 3039, 3000, 3033, 3034 111 01RX-V595-e/fCODE(US) 111 6/23/99, 4:14 PM DVD PLAYER CD PLAYER Manufacturer Code JVC Kenwood Magnavox Mitsubishi Onkyo Panasonic Philips Pioneer Proscan RCA Sony Technics Toshiba Yamaha Zenith 4558 4534 4503 4521 4503 4490 4503, 4539 4525 4522 4522 4533 4490 4503 4490, 4545 4503 LD PLAYER Manufacturer Aiwa Carver Denon Disco Vision Funai Hitachi Magnavox Marantz Mitsubishi NAD Panasonic Philips Pioneer Quasar Realistic Salora Samsung Sega Sony Technics Telefunken Theta Digital Yamaha Code 5203 5064, 5194, 5323 5059, 5172 5023 5203 5023 5194, 5217 5064, 5194 5059 5059 5204 5064, 5194 5059, 5023 5204 5203 5064 5323 5023 5193, 5201 5204 5059 5194 5217 Manufacturer Code ADC 6018 Acoustic Research 6420 Adcom 6155 Aiwa 6157, 6012, 6124 Akai 6156 Arcam 6157 Audio Pro 6437 Audio Research 6157 Audio-Technica 6170 Audio Ton 6157 Audiolab 6157 Audiomeca 6157 BSR 6245 Bestar 6164 Burmester 6420 Bush 6245 California Audio Lab 6029 Carver 6157, 6179, 6437 Condor 6164 Crown 6122 Cyrus 6157 DAK 6245 DKK 6000 Denon 6003, 6034 Elektra 6393, 6437 Emerson 6305, 6155, 6164 Fisher 6179, 6048, 6088, 6342 Garrard 6420, 6393, 6245, 6280, 6425 Genexxa 6032, 6305, 6164, 6426 Goodmans 6305, 6245, 6280 Grundig 6157 Harman/Kardon 6426 Hitachi 6032, 6155 JVC 6072 Kenwood 6028, 6037, 6190, 6048 Kodak 6287 Krell 6157 Kyocera 6018 LXI 6305 Linn 6157 Luxman 6093 MCS 6029, 6043 MTC 6420 Magnavox 6157, 6305 Marantz 6029, 6157, 6180 Matsui 6157 Mclntosh 6287 Memorex 6032, 6305, 6155, 6164, 6180 Meridian 6157 Micromega 6157 Mission 6157 Mitsubishi NAD NEC NSM Nagaoka Naim Nakamichi Nikko Onkyo Optimus 6156 6000 6043 6157 6018 6157 6147 6164, 6170 6101 6000, 6032, 6179, 6305, 6037, 6420, 6048, 6145, 6468, 6087, 6280, 6342, 6426, 6437 Panasonic 6029, 6303 Parasound 6420 Philips 6157, 6287 Pioneer 6032, 6305, 6468, 6244 Poppy 6164 Proton 6157 QED 6157 Quad 6157 Quasar 6029 RCA 6179, 6305, 6053, 6155 Realistic 6179, 6420, 6155, 6164, 6180 Revox 6157 Roadstar 6461 Rotel 6157, 6420 Royal 6420 SAE 6157 STS 6018 Sansui 6157, 6305, 6202 Sanyo 6179, 6048, 6087, 6342 Scott 6305, 6155, 6164 Sears 6305 Sharp 6037, 6180, 6261 Sherwood 6114, 6180, 6426 Shure 6043 Sony 6000, 6185 Soundesign 6145, 6425 Tascam 6420 Teac 6420, 6393, 6180 Technics 6029, 6303 Universum 6157, 6437 Victor 6072 Wards 6157, 6053 Yamaha 6036, 6187, 6261, 6082, 6712 Yorx 6461 MD RECORDER Manufacturer Kenwood Sony Yamaha 112 01RX-V595-e/fCODE(US) 112 6/23/99, 4:14 PM Code 7826 7490 7888, 7490 TAPE DECK Manufacturer Code ADC 8171 Aiwa 8029, 8197 Akai 8283 Arcam 8076 Carver 8029 Denon 8076 Fisher 8074 Garrard 8308, 8309, 8375 GoldStar 8375 Grundig 8029, 8375 JVC 8244, 8274, 8303, 8304, 8310 Kenwood 8071, 8092, 8233, 8234 Kyocera 8171 Magnavox 8029 Marantz 8029, 8009 Memorex 8099 Mitsubishi 8283 Onkyo 8136, 8282 Optimus 8027, 8220, 8337 Panasonic 8229 Philips 8029 Phonotrend 8337 Pioneer 8027, 8220, 8099 Revox 8029, 8190 Sansui 8029, 8009 Sanyo 8074 Sharp 8231 Sherwood 8337 Sonic 8375 Sony 8243, 8170, 8291 Teac 8280, 8289, 8308, 8309 Technics 8229 Universum 8375 Victor 8274 Wards 8027 Yamaha 8097, 8094, 8478, 8524 113 01RX-V595-e/fCODE(US) 113 6/23/99, 4:14 PM LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES (Australia model) LISTE DES CODES FABRICANTS (Modèle pour l’Australie) TV Manufacturer Code Abex Acura Admiral Adyson Akai Akura Alaron Alba 0032 0009 0093, 0163, 0213 0217, 0032 0208, 0361 0218, 0264, 0369 0216 0037, 0218, 0371, 0009, 0036, 0235 Allorgan 0294 Amplivision 0217 Amstrad 0371, 0009, 0362, 0369 Anam 0009, 0068 Anitech 0009, 0068, 0076 Arcam 0216, 0217 Asberg 0076 Asuka 0218 Atlantic 0206 Audiosonic 0037, 0109 Autovox 0206, 0076, 0336 BPL 0282 BSR 0294 BTC 0218 Baird 0343 Basic Line 0218, 0009 Baur 0037, 0010, 0554, 0349, 0361 Beko 0370 Beon 0037 Binatone 0217 Blaupunkt 0554, 0191, 0195, 0200, 0213, 0327, 0328 Blue Sky 0218 Blue Star 0282 Bondstec 0247 Boots 0217 Brandt 0109, 0196, 0198, 0205, 0333, 0335 Brionvega 0362 Britannia 0216 Bush 0037, 0218, 0374, 0371, 0294, 0009, 0282, 0036, 0349 CCE 0037, 0217 CGE 0074, 0076, 0084, 0247, 0306 CS Electronics 0216 CTC 0247 Carrefour 0036 Cascade 0009 Cathay 0037 Centurion 0037 Century 0213 Cimline 0009 Clarivox 0037 Clatronic 0370, 0076, 0247 Condor 0370, 0320 Contec 0216, 0009, 0036, 0157 Continental Edison 0196, 0198, 0205, 0333 Crosley 0074, 0076, 0084, 0213 Crown 0037, 0370, 0418, 0009, 0076 Crystal 0431 Curtis Mathes 0093 Cybertron 0218 Daewoo 0037, 0374, 0009 Dainichi 0218, 0215 Dansai 0037 Dayton 0009 De Graaf 0208 Decca 0037, 0072 Dixi 0037, 0009 Dual 0336, 0352 Dual Tec 0217 Dumont 0070 Elbe 0259 Elin 0037 Elite 0218, 0320 Elta 0009 Emerson 0282, 0213, 0361 Erres 0037, 0012 Expert 0206 Ferguson 0037, 0109, 0005, 0073, 0190, 0238, 0287, 0335, 0343 Fidelity 0216, 0361 Finlandia 0208, 0346, 0359 Finlux 0037, 0072, 0070, 0105, 0346 Firstline 0216, 0217, 0294, 0009, 0321, 0247 Fisher 0370, 0217, 0208, 0303 Flint 0455 Formenti 0037, 0320, 0213 Frontech 0264, 0431, 0163, 0247 Fujitsu 0072, 0206 Funai 0294, 0264, 0303 GE 0282, 0093 GEC 0037, 0217, 0072, 0043, 0205 GPM 0218 Geloso 0009, 0213 Genexxa 0218, 0163 GoldStar 0037, 0217, 0109, 0032, 0290 Goodmans 0037, 0217, 0374, 0371, 0072, 0036, 0235, 0317, 0343 Gorenje 0370 Gradiente 0053 Graetz 0163, 0361 Granada 0037, 0217, 0072, 0146, 0208, 0339, 0359 Grandin 0282 Grundig 0037, 0554, 0070, 0191, 0195, 0205 HCM 0009, 0282 Hanseatic 0037, 0320, 0361 Harley Davidson 0043 Harvard 0068 Hinari 0037, 0218, 0009, 0036 Hisawa 0282, 0455 Hitachi 0217, 0036, 0109, 0032, 0043, 0044, 0105, 0163, 0196, 0198, 0225, 0306, 0349 Huanyu 0216, 0374 Hypson 0037, 0282, 0264 ICE 0217, 0371, 0264 ICeS 0218 ITS 0371 ITT 0163, 0361 Imperial 0370, 0418, 0074, 0076, 0084, 0247 Indiana 0037 Ingelen 0163 Inno Hit 0072 Interbuy 0068 Interfunk 0037, 0163, 0247, 0361 Intervision 0037, 0217, 0264, 0102, 0068 Isukai 0218 JVC 0371, 0036, 0053, 0190, 0192 KTV 0217 Kaisui 0216, 0217, 0218, 0009, 0282 Kamp 0216 Kapsch 0206, 0163 Kawasho 0216 Kendo 0037, 0235, 0362 Kingsley 0216 Kneissel 0259 Korpel 0037 Koyoda 0009 Leyco 0037, 0294, 0072, 0264 Liesenk & Tter 0037 Lloytron 0032 Loewe 0075 Luma 0206 Luxor 0349, 0361 M Electronic 0037, 0217, 0374, 0009, 0109, 0068, 0105, 0163, 0287, 0346 MGA 0150 MTC 0216, 0349 Magnadyne 0102, 0247 Magnafon 0102, 0076, 0213 Magnavox 0036 Manesth 0217, 0320, 0264, 0235 Marantz 0037 Mark 0037 Matsui 0037, 0217, 0371, 0294, 0009, 0072, 0036, 0035, 0011, 0208, 0235 Matsushita 0250 McMichael 0043 114 01RX-V595-e/fCODE(EU) 114 6/23/99, 4:14 PM Mediator 0037, 0012 Memorex 0009, 0250, 0150 Memphis 0337 Metz 0213, 0367 Midland 0032 Minerva 0554, 0070 Minoka 0369 Mitsubishi 0036, 0093, 0108, 0150 Mivar 0216, 0290, 0291, 0292 Motion 0076 Motorola 0093 Multitech 0216, 0217, 0009, 0102, 0076 NEC 0455, 0036 NEI 0037, 0431, 0337 Neckermann 0037, 0554, 0191, 0213, 0349 Nikkai 0037, 0216, 0218, 0072, 0264, 0035, 0032, 0337 Nikko 0317 Nobliko 0102, 0076 Nokia 0361 Nordmende 0109, 0196, 0198, 0213, 0287, 0343 Oceanic 0163, 0215, 0361 Optimus 0250 Optonica 0093 Orion 0037, 0294, 0320, 0321, 0235 Osaki 0217, 0218, 0072, 0264, 0032 Oso 0218 Osume 0072, 0032, 0157 Otake 0317 Otto Versand 0037, 0217, 0320, 0036, 0010, 0554, 0191, 0213, 0343, 0349 Palladium 0370, 0418 Panama 0217, 0264 Panasonic 0250, 0163, 0213, 0214, 0226, 0367 Pathe Cinema 0216, 0320, 0213, 0238 Pathe Marconi 0196, 0198, 0205, 0333 Pausa 0009 Penney 0032 Perdio 0320 Phase 0032 Philco 0074, 0076, 0084, 0213, 0247 Philips 0037, 0374, 0554, 0012, 0043, 0323 Phonola 0037, 0012 Pioneer 0109, 0163, 0287 Profex 0009, 0076, 0361 Proline 0321 Protech 0037, 0217, 0418, 0009, 0264, 0102, 0431, 0247, 0337 Pye 0012 Quasar 0250 Quelle 0037, 0010, 0554, 0011, 0070, 0074, 0084, 0200, 0213, 0306, 0327, 0328, 0361 Questa 0036 R-Line 0037 RBM 0070 RCA 0090, 0093 Radio Shack 0032 Radiola 0037, 0012, 0323 Rank Arena 0036 Realistic 0032 Rediffusion 0361 Revox 0037 Rex 0206, 0264, 0163, 0259 Rhapsody 0216 Roadstar 0218, 0418, 0009, 0264 SBR 0037, 0012, 0043 SEG 0217, 0264, 0036, 0076 SEI 0294, 0102, 0213 Saba 0109, 0075, 0163, 0196, 0198, 0205, 0213, 0287, 0335, 0343 Saccs 0238 Saisho 0009, 0264, 0431, 0011, 0235 Salora 0163, 0349, 0359, 0361 Sambers 0102, 0076, 0213 Sampo 0032 Samsung 0037, 0370, 0217, 0009, 0264, 0032, 0090, 0290 Sandra 0216 Sanyo 0072, 0036, 0011, 0146, 0157, 0208, 0213, 0339 Schaub Lorenz 0361 Schneider 0037, 0218, 0371, 0247, 0303, 0323, 0336, 0352 Sears 0146 Sei-Sinudyne 0010 Seleco 0206, 0163, 0259, 0362 Sentra 0035 Sharp 0036, 0093, 0157 Shorai 0294 Siarem 0102, 0213 Siemens 0037, 0554, 0157, 0191, 0195, 0200, 0213, 0327, 0328 Silver 0036 Sinudyne 0294, 0102, 0213, 0235 Solavox 0032, 0163 Sonitron 0208 Sonoko 0037, 0009 Sonolor 0163, 0208, 0215 Sontec 0037 Sony 0036, 0010, 0011 Soundwave 0037, 0418 Standard 0217, 0218, 0009 Stern 0206, 0163, 0259 Sunkai 0294, 0321 Susumu 0218 Sysline 0037 Tandy 0217, 0218, 0072, 0093, 0163 Tashiko 0217, 0036, 0043, 0359 Tatung 0037, 0217, 0072 Tec 0217, 0247 Technema 0320 Technics 0250 Teknika 0150 Teleavia 0205, 0333, 0343 Telefunken 0109, 0005, 0074, 0084, 0101, 0213, 0262, 0306, 0335, 0343 Telemeister 0320 Teletech Teleton Tensai Texet Thomson 0009 0217, 0206, 0349 0218, 0294, 0320, 0317 0216, 0218 0109, 0196, 0198, 0205, 0287, 0333, 0343, 0349 Thorn 0037, 0072, 0035, 0074, 0084, 0190, 0192, 0361 Thorn-Ferguson 0343 Tomashi 0282 Toshiba 0036, 0035, 0070, 0243 Trical 0157 Triumph 0243 Uher 0206, 0320, 0303 Ultra 0192 Ultravox 0102 Universum 0037, 0370, 0264, 0105, 0346 Vestel 0037 Victor 0053 Videosat 0247 Videotechnic 0217 Vidtech 0036 Vision 0320 Voxson 0163 Waltham 0217 Watson 0037, 0320 Watt Radio 0102 Wega 0036 White Westinghouse 0037, 0216, 0320 Yoko 0037, 0217, 0264, 0431 Zanussi 0206 CABLE Manufacturer Code ABC 1003, 1008, 1014, 1017 Birgmingham Cable Communications 1276 British Telecom 1003, 1105 Cabletime 1161, 1271, 1377 Clyde 1086 Contec 1019 Decsat 1423 Filmnet 1443 France Telecom 1451 GEC 1086 General Instrument 1276 GoldStar 1144 Jerrold 1003, 1276, 1014 MNet 1443, 1019 Magnavox 1032 Memorex 1000 Movie Time 1156 NSC 1156 Oak 1019 PVP Stereo Visual Matrix 1003 Panasonic 1000 Paragon 1000 115 01RX-V595-e/fCODE(EU) 115 6/23/99, 4:14 PM Pioneer Pulsar Runco STS Salora Samsung Satbox Scientific Atlanta Starcom Tele+1 Teleservice Toshiba Tudi United Cable Videoway Westminster Zenith 1144, 1260 1000 1000 1156 1382 1144 1375 1008, 1277, 1017 1003 1443 1281 1000 1286 1003 1250 1105 1000 DBS TUNER Manufacturer Code AST 2321, 2351 Alba 2455, 2421, 2362, 2613 Aldes 2288 Allantide 2333 Amstrad 2080, 2252, 2345, 2461, 2501 Ankaro 2369, 2288, 2220, 2519, 2217 Anttron 2421, 2183 Arcon 2368 Armstrong 2243 Astra 2108, 2539 Astro 2520, 2173, 2358, 2501 Avalon 2396 Axis 2369, 2530 BT 2668 Barcom 2217 Beko 2189 Best 2369, 2217 Blaupunkt 2173 Boca 2243, 2513 Brain Wave 2332 Bush 2067 CNT 2520 Cambridge 2344 Channel Master 2362 Chaparral 2053, 2209 CityCom 2394 Commlink 2288 Connexions 2396 Crown 2243 Cyrus 2200 D-box 2723 DDC 2362 DNT 2396, 2200 Diskxpress 2217 Drake 2268 EIF 2417 Echostar 2396, 2871 Emanon FTE Ferguson Fidelity Finlux Fracarro Freecom Fuba 2421 2331 2183, 2067, 2189, 2336 2252 2455, 2108, 2344, 2397 2871 2421, 2335 2421, 2369, 2396, 2217, 2297, 2417 G-Sat 2183 Galaxis 2288, 2834, 2863 Galaxisat 2321 GoldStar 2335 Gooding 2571 Goodmans 2189 Grothusen 2335 Grundig 2571, 2173, 2189, 2328 Harting und Helling 2333 Hinari 2183 Hirschmann 2502, 2173, 2573, 2287, 2333, 2397, 2398 Hitachi 2455 Houston 2668 Huth 2243, 2288, 2220, 2346 ITT 2108 InVideo 2871 Intervision 2592 JVC 2571 Johansson 2332 Kathrein 2173, 2200, 2092, 2331, 2358, 2394, 2442, 2480, 2504 Kosmos 2331, 2335 Kreiselmeyer 2173 Kyostar 2421 La Sat 2520, 2513, 2464 Lemon 2692 Lenco 2421, 2335 Lennox 2592 Lupus 2369 Luxor 2573, 2108 Manhattan 2455, 2592, 2520 Marantz 2200 Maspro 2092, 2328, 2336 Matsui 2571, 2344 Mediamarkt 2243 Micro Technology 2333, 2539 Minerva 2571 Morgan’s 2243, 2513 Multistar 2331, 2464 Muratto 2335 Navex 2332 Neuhaus 2501 Neusat 2692, 2834 Newhaus 2220 Nikko 2360 Nokia 2455, 2573, 2108, 2328, 2397, 2873 Nordmende 2362 Orbitech 2501 Oxford 2344 Pace 2455, 2183, 2067, 2328, 2336, 2791 Palcom 2297 Palladium 2571 Palsat 2501 Panda 2455 Philips 2455, 2571, 2200, 2292, 2328 Phonotrend 2288, 2592 Planet 2871 Plasmatic 2442 Polytron 2394 Promax 2455 Prosat 2288 Quadral 2362, 2519 RFT 2288, 2220, 2200 Radiola 2200 Radix 2396, 2882 SAT 2321, 2351, 2461 SEG 2421, 2369, 2539 STVI 2417 Saba 2520, 2336 Sabre 2455 Sagem 2820 Salora 2108 Samsung 2287 SatPartner 2421, 2332, 2520, 2502, 2335, 2692 Satcom 2605, 2346 Satec 2183, 2328 Satmaster 2346 Schwaiger 2183, 2394, 2504 Seemann 2396, 2530 Siemens 2173 Skymaster 2288, 2605, 2519 Star Trak 2421 Strong 2421 Sunstar 2513 TPS 2820 Tantec 2455, 2297, 2336 TechniSat 2262, 2501 Techniland 2346 Telefunken 2421 Teleka 2243, 2613 Telesat 2605 Thomson 2455 Tonna 2668, 2346 Triad 2321, 2333, 2335, 2351 Triasat 2501 Unitor 2332, 2217 Universum 2571, 2173 Vector 2333 Ventana 2200 Vortec 2421 Vtech 2351 Wevasat 2333 Winersat 2332 Wisi 2455, 2396, 2173, 2321, 2351, 2372, 2406, 2407 XSat 2889 Xcom Multimedia 2889 Zehnder 2520, 2321, 2331 116 01RX-V595-e/fCODE(EU) 116 6/23/99, 4:14 PM VCR Manufacturer Code ASA 3037, 3081 Admiral 3048 Adventura 3000 Aiko 3278 Aiwa 3000, 3037, 3307, 3348, 3352 Akai 3315, 3106, 3041, 3053 Akiba 3072 Alba 3072, 3020, 3278, 3209, 3315, 3352 Ambassador 3020 Amstrad 3000, 3278, 3325, 3332 Anitech 3072 Asha 3240 Asuka 3037 Audiovox 3037 Baird 3000, 3041, 3104, 3107 Basic Line 3072, 3020, 3278 Beaumark 3240 Bell & Howell 3104 Blaupunkt 3034, 3226, 3195, 3003, 3006, 3154, 3162, 3227, 3403 Brandt 3320, 3187, 3321 Brandt Electronic 3041 Broksonic 3209 Bush 3072, 3278, 3209, 3352 CCE 3072, 3278 CGE 3000 Calix 3037 Capehart 3020 Carver 3081 Catron 3020 Cimline 3072 Cineral 3278 Citizen 3037, 3278 Clatronic 3020 Colt 3072 Combitech 3352 Condor 3020 Craig 3072, 3037, 3047, 3240 Crown 3072, 3020, 3278 Curtis Mathes 3041, 3162 Cybernex 3240 Cyrus 3081 Daewoo 3020, 3278, 3045 Dansai 3072 Daytron 3020 De Graaf 3042, 3166 Decca 3000, 3081 Denon 3042 Dual 3041 Dumont 3000, 3081, 3104 Dynatech 3000 ESC 3278, 3240 Elbe 3038 Elcatech 3072 Electrohome 3037 Electrophonic Emerex Emerson 3037 3032 3000, 3037, 3278, 3209, 3036, 3043, 3088 Ferguson 3320, 3041, 3107, 3321 Fidelity 3000 Finlandia 3081, 3104 Finlux 3000, 3081, 3042, 3104 Firstline 3072, 3037, 3209, 3045, 3043 Fisher 3046, 3047, 3054, 3104 Frontech 3020 Fuji 3033 Funai 3000 GE 3048, 3240 GEC 3081 Garrard 3000 General 3020 Go Video 3432 GoldHand 3072 GoldStar 3037, 3038, 3225 Goodmans 3072, 3000, 3020, 3037, 3278, 3403 Gradiente 3000, 3008 Graetz 3005, 3041, 3104, 3240 Granada 3081, 3046, 3104 Grandin 3072, 3000, 3037 Grundig 3072, 3081, 3347, 3226, 3195, 3003, 3006, 3007, 3207, 3349, 3403 HCM 3072 HI-Q 3047 Hanseatic 3037 Harley Davidson 3000 Harman/Kardon 3038 Harwood 3072 Headquarter 3046 Hinari 3072, 3004, 3240, 3352 Hitachi 3000, 3004, 3042, 3041, 3166, 3235, 3240 Hypson 3072 ITT 3106, 3046, 3384, 3005, 3041, 3104, 3240 ITV 3037, 3278 Imperial 3000 Ingersol 3004 Interfunk 3081 JVC 3067, 3384, 3008, 3041, 3206, 3207, 3486 Jensen 3041 KEC 3037, 3278 KLH 3072 Kaisui 3072 Kendo 3209, 3106 Kenwood 3067, 3384, 3038, 3041 Kodak 3037 Korpel 3072 LXI 3037 Lenco 3278 Leyco 3072 LIoyd’s 3000 Loewe 3037, 3004, 3081, 3006 Logik 3072, 3004, 3240 Luxor 3106, 3048, 3046, 3043, 3104 M Electronic 3000 MGA 3043, 3240 MGN Technology 3240 MTC 3000, 3240 Magnasonic 3278 Magnavox 3000, 3081 Magnin 3240 Manesth 3072, 3045 Marantz 3081, 3003, 3006 Marta 3037 Matsui 3209, 3004, 3036, 3088, 3348, 3352 Matsushita 3162 Memorex 3000, 3037, 3048, 3046, 3047, 3104, 3162, 3240, 3307 Memphis 3072 Metz 3347, 3195, 3003, 3006, 3162, 3227 Minerva 3195, 3006 Minolta 3042 Mitsubishi 3081, 3067, 3048, 3043 Motorola 3048 Multitech 3072, 3000 Murphy 3000 NEC 3067, 3038, 3041, 3104 Neckermann 3081 Nesco 3072 Nikko 3037 Nikon 3034 Noblex 3240 Nokia 3106, 3046, 3041, 3104, 3240 Nordmende 3320, 3384, 3041, 3297, 3321 Oceanic 3000, 3041 Okano 3315, 3348 Olympus 3226 Optimus 3037, 3432, 3048, 3104, 3162 Orion 3209, 3004, 3036, 3088, 3348, 3352 Osaki 3072, 3000, 3037 Otto Versand 3081 Palladium 3072, 3037, 3006, 3041 Panasonic 3226, 3162, 3225, 3227 Pathe Cinema 3036 Pathe Marconi 3041 Penney 3037, 3042, 3038, 3054, 3240 Pentax 3042 Perdio 3000 Philco 3209, 3038 Philips 3081, 3384, 3403 Phonola 3081 Pilot 3037 Pioneer 3081, 3067, 3162, 3235 Portland 3020 Profex 3322 Profitronic 3240 Proline 3000 Protec 3072 Pye 3081 117 01RX-V595-e/fCODE(EU) 117 6/23/99, 4:14 PM Quarter Quartz Quasar Quelle RCA RFT Radio Shack Radiola Radix Randex Realistic 3046 3046 3162 3081 3106, 3042, 3048, 3240 3403 3000, 3037 3081 3037 3037 3000, 3037, 3048, 3046, 3047, 3104 Rex 3384, 3041 Ricoh 3034 Roadstar 3072, 3037, 3278, 3240 SBR 3081 SEG 3322, 3240 SEI 3004, 3081 STS 3042 Saba 3320, 3384, 3041, 3206, 3207, 3297, 3321 Saisho 3209, 3004, 3036, 3088 Salora 3106, 3046, 3043 Samsung 3432, 3045, 3053, 3240 Sanky 3048 Sansui 3000, 3067, 3041 Sanyo 3046, 3047, 3104, 3240 Saville 3352 Schaub Lorenz 3000, 3005, 3041, 3104 Schneider 3072, 3000, 3081 Scott 3045, 3043 Sears 3000, 3037, 3042, 3046, 3047, 3054, 3104 Seleco 3041 Semp 3045 Sentra 3020 Sharp 3048 Shintom 3072, 3104 Shogun 3240 Shorai 3004 Siemens 3037, 3081, 3195, 3003, 3006, 3054, 3104 Silva 3037 Singer 3072, 3045 Sinudyne 3004, 3081 Solavox 3020 Sonolor 3046 Sontec 3037 Sony 3000, 3032, 3033, 3034, 3011 Sunkai 3348 Sunstar 3000 Suntronic 3000 Sylvania 3000, 3081, 3043 Symphonic 3000 TMK 3036, 3240 Tashiko 3000 Tatung 3000, 3081, 3041 Teac 3000, 3041 Tec 3020 Technics 3226, 3162 Teknika 3000, 3037 Teleavia Telefunken 3041 3320, 3384, 3041, 3187, 3321 Tenosal 3072 Tensai 3322, 3000 Thomas 3000 Thomson 3320, 3384, 3041 Thorn 3036, 3041, 3104 Toshiba 3081, 3045, 3384, 3041, 3043 Totevision 3037, 3240 Towada 3322 Uher 3240 Unitech 3240 Universum 3000, 3037, 3081, 3106, 3195, 3006, 3240, 3325 Vector 3045 Vector Research 3038 Video Concepts 3045 Videosonic 3240 Wards 3072, 3000, 3081, 3042, 3048, 3047, 3240 White Westinghouse 3278 XR-1000 3072, 3000 Yamaha 3038 Yamishi 3072 Yokan 3072 Yoko 3020, 3240 Zenith 3000, 3033, 3034 DVD PLAYER Manufacturer Kenwood Magnavox Onkyo Panasonic Philips Pioneer Sony Technics Thomson Toshiba Yamaha Zenith Code 4534 4503 4503 4490 4539, 4503 4525 4533 4490 4551 4503 4490, 4545 4503 LD PLAYER Manufacturer Aiwa Carver Cyrus Denon Disco Vision Funai Hitachi Magnavox Marantz Code 5203 5064, 5194 5388 5059, 5172 5023 5203 5023 5194, 5217 5064, 5194 Mitsubishi NAD Panasonic Philips Pioneer Quasar Radiola Realistic Salora Sega Sharp Sony Technics Telefunken Theta Digital Thorn Yamaha CD PLAYER Manufacturer 118 Code Aiwa 6124, 6157, 6419 Akai 6108, 6156, 6199 Alba 6536, 6288, 6334 Arcam 6157 Audio Research 6157 Audio Ton 6157 Audiolab 6157 Audiomeca 6157 BSR 6134 Bestar 6164 Binatone 6452 California Audio Lab 6029 Carver 6157, 6179 Condor 6134, 6164 Cyrus 6157 DKK 6000 Denon 6003, 6034 Dual 6196 Emerson 6164 Fisher 6048, 6179, 6342 GE 6334 Genexxa 6032, 6164 GoldStar 6525, 6383 Goodmans 6536 Grundig 6157 Harman/Kardon 6108, 6173 Hitachi 6032, 6291 JVC 6072 Kenwood 6037, 6523, 6028, 6048, 6190 Kodak 6287 Krell 6157 Linn 6157 Luxman 6328 M Electronic 6525 MCS 6029 Magnavox 6157, 6038, 6129 118 01RX-V595-e/fCODE(EU) 5059 5059 5204, 5496 5064, 5388, 5194 5023, 5059 5204 5388 5203 5064 5023 5001 5193, 5201 5204, 5496 5059 5194 5014 5217 6/23/99, 4:14 PM Marantz Matsui Mclntosh Memorex Meridian Micromega Mission Mitsubishi NAD NSM Naim Nikko Onkyo Optimus Panasonic Philips Pioneer Poppy Proton QED Quad Quasar RCA Realistic Revox Roadstar Rotel SAE Sansui Sanyo Schneider Scott Sharp Sherwood Siemens Signature Sony Teac Technics Toshiba Universum Victor Wards Yamaha Yorx 6157, 6029, 6038, 6129 6157, 6288, 6307 6287 6032, 6164 6157 6157 6157 6108, 6156 6000 6157 6157 6525, 6164 6101, 6102 6000, 6032, 6037, 6536, 6048, 6179, 6196, 6342 6303, 6029, 6367 6157, 6274, 6287 6032 6164 6157 6157 6157 6029 6179 6164, 6179 6157, 6113 6461, 6525, 6527 6157 6157 6157, 6202, 6513 6048, 6179, 6342 6134 6164 6037, 6262, 6265 6114, 6196 6516 6108 6000, 6490 6378 6207, 6303, 6029 6481 6157 6072 6157, 6108 6036, 6082, 6187, 6712 6461 MD RECORDER Manufacturer Kenwood Sony Yamaha Code 7826 7490 7888, 7490 TAPE DECK Manufacturer Code Aiwa Akai Arcam Carver Denon Fisher Grundig Harman/Kardon JVC Kenwood 8029, 8197, 8200 8188, 8189 8076 8029 8076, 8412 8074 8029 8182 8244, 8273, 8274 8070, 8071, 8092, 8205, 8233, 8234 Magnavox 8029 Marantz 8029, 8009 Memorex 8099, 8101 Mitsubishi 8189 Onkyo 8136, 8135 Optimus 8027, 8220 Panasonic 8229 Philips 8029 Pioneer 8027, 8099, 8101, 8220 Revox 8029 Sansui 8029, 8009 Sanyo 8074 Sharp 8205 Sony 8170, 8243 Technics 8229 Victor 8273, 8274 Wards 8027 Yamaha 8094, 8097, 8205, 8478, 8524 119 01RX-V595-e/fCODE(EU) 119 6/23/99, 4:14 PM Quick Reference Card TAPE/MD AMP/TUN POWER STANDBY CD DVD/LD POWER POWER POWER INPUT INPUT INPUT DISC SKIP DISC SKIP SELECTOR DIAL INPUT EXT. DEC. TEST A/B/C/D/E DSP selector PRESET UP DOWN VOLUME MUTE EFFECT ON/OFF (TV VOLUME) (TV VOLUME) (TV VOLUME) (TV VOLUME) (TV POWER) DISPLAY (MD) SLEEP (TV POWER) REC/PAUSE DIR A (TAPE) SKIP (MD) PLAY SET MENU TIME/LEVEL REWIND (TAPE) BACKWARD (MD) DECK A/B (TAPE) PAUSE (MD) DIR B (TAPE) SKIP (MD) STOP FAST FORWARD DISPLAY DISPLAY (TV POWER) SKIP PLAY BACKWARD (TV POWER) (TV INPUT) PAUSE STOP FAST FORWARD SKIP/SEARCH PLAY SUBTITLE (DVD) BACKWARD (LD) SUBTITLE ON/OFF (DVD) (TV INPUT) PAUSE STOP ANGLE (DVD) FAST FORWARD (LD) AUDIO (DVD) DSP DSP program V296050